BA01997D/06/EN/03.23-00
716202912023-07-28

Products

Solutions

Valid as of version
01.00.zz (Device firmware)

Operating Instructions
Proline t-mass I 500
Thermal mass flowmeter
HART

Services

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

• Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available whenworking on or with the device.
• To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section
carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific toworking procedures.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser Sales Center will supply you with current information and updates tothese instructions.

2

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Table of contents

Table of contents
1

About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1.1
1.2

1.4

Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.1 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.2 Electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.3 Communication-specific symbols . . . . . 6
1.2.4 Tool symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.5 Symbols forcertain types of information . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.6 Symbols in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3.1 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7

Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Device-specific IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7.2 Protecting access via a password . . . . 11
2.7.3 Access via web server . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.7.4 Access via service interface (CDIRJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1.3

3

Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.1

Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.1.1 Proline 500 – digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.1.2 Proline 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

4.1
4.2

Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.2 Sensor nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.3 Symbols on the device . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.3.1 Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.3.2 Transporting the product . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.3.3 Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

4.3

5

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

5.1

Mounting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 Installation position . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2 Environment and process
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3 Special mounting instructions . . . . . .

Endress+Hauser

19
19
25
27

5.2

5.3

Mounting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.2.1 Required tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.2.2 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 28
5.2.3 Mounting the measuring device . . . . . 28
5.2.4 Mounting the transmitter housing:
Proline 500 – digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

6

Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

6.1
6.2

6.7

Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connection requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6.2.2 Requirements for connection cable . . . 33
6.2.3 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.2.4 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 37
Connecting the measuring device: Proline
500 – digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6.3.1 Connecting the connecting cable . . . . 38
6.3.2 Connecting the signal cable and the
supply voltage cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.4.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.5.1 Connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 46
6.6.1 Degree of protection IP68, Type 6P
enclosure, with "Cust-potted" option . . 47
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

7

Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

7.1
7.2

Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Structure and function of the operating
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7.2.1 Structure of the operating menu . . . . 49
7.2.2 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Access to operating menu via local display . . . 51
7.3.1 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.3.2 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.3.3 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.3.4 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.3.5 Opening the context menu . . . . . . . . . 57
7.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list . . . 59
7.3.7 Calling the parameter directly . . . . . . 59
7.3.8 Calling up help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.3.9 Changing the parameters . . . . . . . . . 60
7.3.10 User roles and related accessauthorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.3.11 Disabling write protection via accesscode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Access to operating menu via web browser . . . 62
7.4.1 Function range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.4.2 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

6.3

6.4
6.5
6.6

7.3

7.4

3

Table of contents

7.5

7.4.3 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . 64
7.4.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.4.5 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7.4.6 Disabling the Web server . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.4.7 Logging out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Access to the operating menu via theoperating tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.5.1 Connecting the operating tool . . . . . . 69
7.5.2 Field Xpert SFX350, SFX370 . . . . . . . 72
7.5.3 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.5.4 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.5.5 AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.5.6 Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.5.7 SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

8

System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

8.1

8.3

Overview of device description files . . . . . . . . . 75
8.1.1 Current version data for the device . . . 75
8.1.2 Operating tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Measured variables via HART protocol . . . . . . 75
8.2.1 Device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Other settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

9Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4

Post-mounting and post-connection check . . . 80
Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . 80
Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 81
9.4.1 Defining the tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
9.4.2 Configuring the measurement mode . 82
9.4.3 Configuring reference conditions . . . . 86
9.4.4 Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
9.4.5 Setting the system units . . . . . . . . . . 88
9.4.6 Displaying the I/O configuration . . . . 90
9.4.7 Configuring the current input . . . . . . 91
9.4.8 Configuring the status input . . . . . . . 92
9.4.9 Configuring the current output . . . . . 93
9.4.10 Configuring the pulse/frequency/
switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
9.4.11 Configuring the relay output . . . . . . 102
9.4.12 Configuring the local display . . . . . . 103
9.4.13 Configuring the low flow cut off . . . . 106
Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
9.5.1 Using the parameter to enter theaccess code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
9.5.2 Configuring the totalizer . . . . . . . . . 107
9.5.3 Carrying out additional display
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
9.5.4 WLAN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
9.5.5 Configuration management . . . . . . . 113
9.5.6 Using parameters for device
administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
9.5.7 In-situ adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Configuration management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
9.6.1 Function scope of the "Configuration
management" parameter . . . . . . . . . 123
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

8.2

9.5

9.6
9.7

4

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

9.8

Protecting settings from unauthorized access 126
9.8.1 Write protection via access code . . . 126
9.8.2 Write protection via write protection
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

10Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

10.1 Reading off the device locking status . . . . . . 130
10.2 Adjusting the operating language . . . . . . . . . 130
10.3 Configuring the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10.4 Reading off measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10.4.1 Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10.4.2 System values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10.4.3 "Totalizer" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10.4.4 "Input values" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 133
10.4.5 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
10.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10.6 Performing a totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10.6.1 Function scope of "Control Totalizer"
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.6.2 Function range of "Reset all
totalizers" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.7 Displaying data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

11

Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 140

11.1 General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
11.2 Diagnostic information via light emitting
diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.2.2 Sensor connection housing . . . . . . . 144
11.3 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 145
11.3.1 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
11.3.2 Calling up remedial measures . . . . . 147
11.4 Diagnostic information in the web browser . . 148
11.4.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
11.4.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 149
11.5 Diagnostic information in FieldCare or
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
11.5.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
11.5.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 151
11.6 Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 152
11.6.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . 152
11.6.2 Adapting the status signal . . . . . . . . 152
11.7 Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 154
11.8 Pending diagnostic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
11.9 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
11.10 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
11.10.1 Reading out the event logbook . . . . . 160
11.10.2 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . 160
11.10.3 Overview of information events . . . . 161
11.11 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 163
11.11.1 Function range of "Device reset"
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
11.12 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
11.13 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

12

Table of contents

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

12.1

Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
12.1.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
12.1.2 Sensing element cleaning . . . . . . . . 167
12.1.3 Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
12.2 Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 168
12.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

13

Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

13.1

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
13.1.1 Repair and conversion concept . . . . . 169
13.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion . . . . 169
13.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
13.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
13.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
13.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
13.5.1 Removing the measuring device . . . . 170
13.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device . . 170

14

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4

Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
14.1.1 For the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
14.1.2 For the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . 173
Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

15Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

15.1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
15.2 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
15.3 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
15.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
15.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
15.6 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.7 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
15.8 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
15.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
15.10 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
15.11 Display and user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
15.12 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
15.13 Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
15.14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
15.15 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Endress+Hauser

5About this document

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

1

About this document

1.1

Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information required in the various life cycle
phases of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and storage, toinstallation, connection, operation and commissioning, through to troubleshooting,
maintenance and disposal.

1.2

Symbols

1.2.1

Safety symbols

DANGER

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result inserious or fatal injury.
WARNING

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result inserious or fatal injury.
CAUTION

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result inminor or medium injury.
NOTICE

This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result inpersonal injury.

1.2.2

Electrical symbols
SymbolMeaning
Direct current
Alternating current
Direct current and alternating current
Ground connection
A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via agrounding system.
Potential equalization connection (PE: protective earth)Ground terminals that must be connected to ground prior to establishing any otherconnections.
The ground terminals are located on the interior and exterior of the device:• Interior ground terminal: potential equalization is connected to the supply network.
• Exterior ground terminal: device is connected to the plant grounding system.

1.2.3

Communication-specific symbols
SymbolMeaning
Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)
Communication via a wireless, local network.
LED
Light emitting diode is off.

6

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

About this document

SymbolMeaning
LED
Light emitting diode is on.
LED
Light emitting diode is flashing.

1.2.4

Tool symbols
SymbolMeaning
Torx screwdriver
Phillips head screwdriver
Open-ended wrench

1.2.5

Symbols for certain types of information
SymbolMeaning
Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.
Preferred
Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred.
Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.
Tip
Indicates additional information.
Reference to documentation
Reference to pageA

Reference to graphic
Notice or individual step to be observed
1. , 2. , 3. …

Series of steps
Result of a step
Help in the event of a problem
Visual inspection

1.2.6

Symbols in graphics
SymbolMeaning

1, 2, 3, ...

Item numbers

1. , 2. , 3. , …

Series of steps

A, B, C, ...

Views

A-A, B-B, C-C, ...

Sections

Endress+Hauser

Hazardous area

7

About this document

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Symbol.

Meaning
Safe area (non-hazardous area)
Flow direction

1.3

Documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number from thenameplate• Endress+Hauser Operations app: Enter serial number from nameplate or scanmatrix code on nameplate.

1.3.1

Document function

The following documentation may be available depending on the version ordered:
Document type

Purpose and content of the document

Technical Information (TI)

Planning aid for your device
The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides
an overview of the accessories and other products that can be ordered forthe device.

Brief Operating Instructions (KA)

Guide that takes you quickly to the 1st measured value
The Brief Operating Instructions contain all the essential informationfrom incoming acceptance to initial commissioning.

Operating Instructions (BA)Your reference document
The Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in
the various phases of the life cycle of the device: from productidentification, incoming acceptance and storage, to mounting,connection, operation and commissioning through to troubleshooting,
maintenance and disposal.

Description of Device Parameters(GP)

Reference for your parameters
The document provides a detailed explanation of each individual
parameter. The description is aimed at those who work with the device
over the entire life cycle and perform specific configurations.

Safety Instructions (XA)

Depending on the approval, safety instructions for electrical equipment inhazardous areas are also supplied with the device. The Safety Instructions
are an integral part of the Operating Instructions.
Information on the Safety Instructions (XA) relevant to the device is provided
on the nameplate.

Supplementary device-dependent
documentation (SD/FY)

1.4

Always comply strictly with the instructions in the relevant
supplementary documentation. The supplementary documentation is an
integral part of the device documentation.

Registered trademarks

HART®
Registered trademark of the FieldComm Group, Austin, Texas, USA

8

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Safety instructions

2

Safety instructions

2.1

Requirements for the personnel

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:‣ Trained, qualified specialists must have a relevant qualification for this specific function
and task.
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator.
‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations.
‣ Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual andsupplementary documentation as well as the certificates (depending on theapplication).
‣ Follow instructions and comply with basic conditions.
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:‣ Are instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the facility'sowner-operator.

‣ Follow the instructions in this manual.

2.2

Intended use

Application and media
The measuring device described in this manual is intended only for the flow measurementof gases.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentiallyexplosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas or where the process pressures pose anincreased risk, are marked specifically on the nameplate.
To ensure that the measuring device remains in proper condition for the operation time:‣ Use the measuring device only for media to which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.
‣ Only use the measuring device in full compliance with the data on the nameplate andthe general conditions listed in the Operating Instructions and supplementary
documentation.
‣ Check the nameplate to verify if the device ordered can be put to its intended use in thehazardous area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure equipment safety).
‣ If the ambient temperature of the measuring device is outside the atmospheric range, it
is absolutely essential to comply with the relevant basic conditions as specified →  8in the device documentation.
‣ Protect the measuring device permanently against corrosion from environmental
influences.
Incorrect use
Non-designated use can compromise safety. The manufacturer is not liable for damage
caused by improper or non-designated use.

LWARNING
Danger of breakage due to corrosive or abrasive fluids and ambient conditions!
‣ Verify the compatibility of the process fluid with the sensor material.
‣ Ensure the resistance of all fluid-wetted materials in the process.
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.

Endress+Hauser

9Safety instructions

Proline t-mass I 500 HARTNOTICE
Verification for borderline cases:‣ For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistancein verifying the corrosion resistance of fluid-wetted materials, but does not accept any
warranty or liability as minute changes in the temperature, concentration or level ofcontamination in the process can alter the corrosion resistance properties.

LWARNING
Injury from sensor being ejected!
‣ The sensor gland should be opened only when in an unpressurized state.
NOTICE
Penetration of dust and moisture when the transmitter housing is opened.
‣ Only open the transmitter housing briefly, ensuring that no dust or moisture enters the
housing.
Residual risks

LCAUTION
The electronics and the medium may cause the surfaces to heat up or freeze. Risk ofburns or frostbite!
‣ Mount suitable touch protection.

2.3

Workplace safety

When working on and with the device:‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment as per national regulations.

2.4

Operational safety

Damage to the device!

‣ Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only.
‣ The operator is responsible for the interference-free operation of the device.
Modifications to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers!
‣ If modifications are nevertheless required, consult with the manufacturer.
RepairTo ensure continued operational safety and reliability:‣ Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted.
‣ Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to the repair of an electrical device.
‣ Use only original spare parts and accessories.

2.5

Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meetstate-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition inwhich it is safe to operate.
It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU
directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. The manufacturer
confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device..

10

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Safety instructions

2.6

IT security

Our warranty is valid only if the product is installed and used as described in the Operating
Instructions. The product is equipped with security mechanisms to protect it against any
inadvertent changes to the settings.
IT security measures, which provide additional protection for the product and associateddata transfer, must be implemented by the operators themselves in line with their security
standards.

2.7

Device-specific IT security

The device offers a range of specific functions to support protective measures on theoperator's side. These functions can be configured by the user and guarantee greater inoperation safety if used correctly. The following list provides an overview of the mostimportant functions:
Function/interface

Factory setting

Recommendation

Write protection via hardware write
protection switch →  11

Not enabled

On an individual basis following risk
assessment

Access code(also applies to web server login or
FieldCare connection) →  12

Not enabled(0000)

Assign a customized access code duringcommissioning

WLAN(order option in display module)

EnabledOn an individual basis following risk
assessment

WLAN security mode

Enabled (WPA2PSK)Do not change

WLAN passphrase(Password) →  12

Serial number

Assign an individual WLAN passphrase duringcommissioning

WLAN mode

Access point

On an individual basis following risk
assessment

Web server →  12

EnabledOn an individual basis following risk
assessment

CDI-RJ45 service interface→  13–

On an individual basis following risk
assessment

2.7.1

Protecting access via hardware write protection

Write access to the parameters of the device via the local display, web browser or
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be disabled via a write protection switch(DIP switch on the main electronics module). When hardware write protection is enabled,
only read access to the parameters is possible.
Hardware write protection is disabled when the device is delivered →  128.

2.7.2

Protecting access via a password

Different passwords are available to protect write access to the device parameters or accessto the device via the WLAN interface.

Endress+Hauser

11

Safety instructions

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

• User-specific access code
Protect write access to the device parameters via the local display, web browser or
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare). Access authorization is clearly regulated
through the use of a user-specific access code.
• WLAN passphrase
The network key protects a connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook ortablet) and the device via the WLAN interface which can be ordered as an option.
• Infrastructure mode
When the device is operated in infrastructure mode, the WLAN passphrase corresponds
to the WLAN passphrase configured on the operator side.
User-specific access code
Write access to the device parameters via the local display, web browser or operating tool(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be protected by the modifiable, user-specific access code(→  126).
When the device is delivered, the device does not have an access code and is equivalent to0000 (open).
WLAN passphrase: Operation as WLAN access point
A connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the
WLAN interface (→  71), which can be ordered as an optional extra, is protected by
the network key. The WLAN authentication of the network key complies with theIEEE 802.11 standard.
When the device is delivered, the network key is pre-defined depending on the device. It
can be changed via the WLAN settings submenu in the WLAN passphrase parameter(→  113).
Infrastructure mode
A connection between the device and WLAN access point is protected by means of an SSID
and passphrase on the system side. Please contact the relevant system administrator foraccess.
General notes on the use of passwords• The access code and network key supplied with the device should be changed duringcommissioning for safety reasons.
• Follow the general rules for generating a secure password when defining and managing
the access code and network key.
• The user is responsible for the management and careful handling of the access code andnetwork key.
• For information on configuring the access code or on what to do if you lose thepassword, for example, see "Write protection via access code" →  126.

2.7.3

Access via web server

The integrated web server can be used to operate and configure the device via a web
browser →  62. The connection is established via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) or
the WLAN interface.
The web server is enabled when the device is delivered. The web server can be disabled via
the Web server functionality parameter if necessary (e.g. after commissioning).
The device and status information can be hidden on the login page. This prevents
unauthorized access to the information.
For detailed information on device parameters, see:"Description of Device Parameters" document (Verweisziel existiert nicht, aber@y.link.required='true').
12

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Safety instructions

2.7.4

Access via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

The device can be connected to a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45). Devicespecific functions guarantee the secure operation of the device in a network.
The use of relevant industrial standards and guidelines that have been defined by national
and international safety committees, such as IEC/ISA62443 or the IEEE, is recommended.
This includes organizational security measures such as the assignment of accessauthorization as well as technical measures such as network segmentation.

Endress+Hauser

13

Product description

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

3

Product description

The measuring system consists of a transmitter and a sensor. The transmitter and sensor
are mounted in physically separate locations. They are interconnected by connecting
cables.

3.1

Product design

3.1.1

Proline 500 – digital

Signal transmission: digital
Order code for "Integrated ISEM electronics", option A "Sensor"
For use in applications not required to meet special requirements due to ambient oroperating conditions.
As the electronics are located in the sensor, the device is ideal:
For simple transmitter replacement.
• A standard cable can be used as the connecting cable.
• Not sensitive to external EMC interference.
1

2

3

ES

-

C

+

-

4

5

A0042018

1
2
3
4
5

Electronics compartment cover
Display module
Transmitter housing
Sensor connection housing with integrated ISEM electronics: connecting cable connection
Sensor

3.1.2

Proline 500

Signal transmission: analog
Order code for "Integrated ISEM electronics", option B "Transmitter"
14

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification

4.1

Incoming acceptance
Are the order codes on thedelivery note (1) and the
product sticker (2) identical?

1
2

1
2

Are the goods undamaged?

Does the data on the
nameplate match the orderspecifications on the delivery
note?

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

i

i

Date:

Is the envelope present withaccompanying documents?

• If one of the conditions is not satisfied, contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
• The Technical Documentation is available via the Internet or via the Endress+Hauser
Operations app: Product identification→  16.

4.2

Product identification

The following options are available for identification of the device:• Nameplate• Order code with details of the device features on the delivery note
• Enter the serial numbers from the nameplates in the Device Viewer(www.endress.com/deviceviewer): all the information about the device is displayed.
• Enter the serial numbers from the nameplates into the Endress+Hauser Operations app
or scan the DataMatrix code on the nameplate with the Endress+Hauser Operations app:
all the information about the device is displayed.

Endress+Hauser

15

Incoming acceptance and product identification

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• The "Additional standard documentation on the device" and "Supplementary devicedependent documentation" sections• The Device Viewer: Enter the serial number from the nameplate(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)• The Endress+Hauser Operations app: Enter the serial number from the nameplate orscan the DataMatrix code on the nameplate.

4.2.1

Transmitter nameplate

Proline 500 – digital
1

2

3

4
18
17
16
15
14

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

5
6

i

13

7

Date:

i

12

11

10

9

8
A0029194

1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

16

Example of a transmitter nameplate
Name of the transmitter
Manufacturer address/certificate holder
Space for approvals: use in hazardous areas
Degree of protection
Electrical connection data: available inputs and outputs
Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)2-D matrix code
Space for approvals and certificates: e.g., CE mark, RCM tick
Permitted temperature range for cable
Date of manufacture: year-monthFirmware version (FW) and device revision (Dev.Rev.) from the factory
Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
Space for additional information in the case of special products
Available inputs and outputs, supply voltage
Electrical connection data: supply voltage
Extended order code
Serial number
Order code

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4.2.2

Sensor nameplate
12
34

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext.ord.cd.:

5

5

Date:

6
A0041926

2
1
2
3
4
5

6

Example of sensor nameplate
Name of sensor
Order code
Serial number
Extended order code
Flow; length of sensor; pressure rating; nominal pressure; system pressure; medium temperature range;
permitted ambient temperature range (Ta); explosion protection approval information, Pressure Equipment
Directive and degree of protection
Date of manufacture: year-month

Order code
The measuring device is reordered using the order code.
Extended order code
• The device type (product root) and basic specifications (mandatory features) arealways listed.
• Of the optional specifications (optional features), only the safety and approvalrelated specifications are listed (e.g. LA). If other optional specifications are alsoordered, these are indicated collectively using the # placeholder symbol (e.g. #LA#).
• If the ordered optional specifications do not include any safety and approval-related
specifications, they are indicated by the + placeholder symbol (e.g. XXXXXX-ABCDE
+).

4.2.3
SymbolSymbols on the device
MeaningWARNING!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious
or fatal injury. Please consult the documentation for the measuring device to discover the type of
potential danger and measures to avoid it.
Reference to documentation
Refers to the corresponding device documentation.
Protective ground connection
A terminal that must be connected to the ground prior to establishing any other connections.

Endress+Hauser

17

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4.3

Storage and transport

4.3.1

Storage conditions

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Observe the following notes for storage:‣ Store in the original packaging to ensure protection from shock.
‣ Do not remove protective covers or protective caps installed on process connections.
They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in themeasuring tube.
‣ Protect from direct sunlight. Avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures.
‣ Select a storage location that excludes the possibility of condensation forming on themeasuring device. Fungi and bacteria can damage the liner.
‣ Store in a dry and dust-free place.
‣ Do not store outdoors.
Storage temperature →  191

4.3.2

Transporting the productTransport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging.
Do not remove protection caps. They prevent mechanical damage.

4.3.3

Packaging disposal

All packaging materials are environmentally friendly and 100% recyclable:• Outer packaging of device
Stretch wrap made of polymer in accordance with EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS)• Packaging• Wood crate treated in accordance with ISPM 15 standard, confirmed by IPPC logo
• Cardboard box in accordance with European packaging guideline 94/62/EC,
recyclability confirmed by Resy symbol• Transport material and fastening fixtures• Disposable plastic pallet• Plastic straps• Plastic adhesive strips• Filler material
Paper pads

18

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Mounting

5

Mounting

5.1

Mounting requirements• The recommended inlet and outlet specifications must be observed.
• The piping system and the device must be installed according to good engineering
practice.
• Ensure the correct alignment and orientation of the sensor.
• Take measures to avoid or prevent condensation (e.g. condensation trap, thermal
insulation etc.).
• Observe the maximum permissible ambient temperatures and medium temperature
range.
• Install the measuring device in a shady location or use a weather protection cover.
• For mechanical reasons and to protect the pipe, support is recommended for heavy
sensors (e.g. with a hot-tap retractable assembly).

5.1.1

Installation position

Orientation
The direction of flow must match the direction of the arrow on the sensor. In the case of
the bidirectional sensor, the arrow points in the positive direction. When performing
bidirectional measurement, the sensing element must be installed with an accuracy of 3°.
Orientation

Recommendation

1)

Vertical orientation
A0015591

Horizontal orientation,transmitter head up
A0015589

Horizontal orientation,transmitter head down

2)

A0015590

Horizontal orientation,transmitter head at side

A0015592

αInclined orientation,transmitter head down

2)

A0015773

1)
2)

Endress+Hauser

In the case of saturated or impure gases, vertical orientation is preferred in order to minimize
condensation or contamination. For bidirectional sensors, select horizontal orientation.
Select inclined orientation (α = approx. 135°) for very wet or water-saturated gas (e.g. digester gas,
undried compressed air), or if deposits or condensate are constantly present.

19

Mounting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Pipes
The measuring device must be professionally installed, and the following points must
be observed:• Weld pipes professionally.
• Use seals of the correct size.
• Align flanges and seals correctly.
• Remove protection cap from sensing element.
• Following installation, the pipe must be free from dirt and particles in order to avoid
damage to the sensors.
• For further information → ISO standard 14511.
Sensor selection and arrangement
The minimum length of the sensor can be determined using the Endress+Hauser
Applicator program (version 10.00 or higher) or with the calculation formula below.
The minimum length of the sensor is determined by the necessary insertion depth. The
calculated necessary insertion depth must be within the adjusting range of the selected
insertion version.
Insertion depth
The minimum length of the insertion version can be determined using the Endress+Hauser
Applicator program or with the calculation formula below. The calculated necessary
insertion depth must be within the adjusting range of the selected insertion version.
NOTICE
Metal ferrules undergo plastic deformation during the initial installation.
As a result the insertion depth is fixed after initial installation and the ferrules can nolonger be replaced.
‣ Pay attention to information on preconditions and on determining the insertion depth.
‣ Check the insertion depth closely before tightening the ferrules.

9

230

230

9

220

220

210

210

200
190

8

180

8

200
190

200

7

180
7

190
180
7

A

A

B

B

C1 C2

230
220

210
8

C1 C2

9

A0039548

3
A
B
C1
C2

Determine the dimensions A, B, C1 and C2
In the case of a circular pipe: the pipe internal diameter (DN); in the case of a duct: the inner dimension
Thickness of pipe wall or of duct wall
Mounting kit
Sensor's compression fitting

Calculating the insertion depth
Insertion depth = (0.3⋅ A) + B + (C1 + C2)
The insertion depth must be at least 100mm.

20

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Mounting

Determining dimensions C1 and C2
If only Endress+Hauser mounting bosses are used
Mounting boss 1" NPT

C1 + C2 = 112 mm (4.409 in)Mounting boss G1"

C1 + C2 = 106 mm (4.173 in)Mounting boss ¾" NPT

C1 + C2 = 108 mm (4.252 in)Mounting boss G¾"

C1 + C2 = 105 mm (4.134 in)

If a cold/hot tap is used, use dimension "L" →  194 instead of "C1".
Use Applicator to determine dimensions C1 and C2 if using other E+H mounting kits
(e.g. cold/hot taps).
If not exclusively using Endress+Hauser mounting bosses
C1

Length of pipe connection used

C2 (compression fittingwith 1" NPT thread)

52 mm (2.047 in)C2 (compression fittingwith G1" thread)

46 mm (1.811 in)C2 (compression fittingwith ¾" NPT thread)

48 mm (1.889 in)C2 (compression fittingwith G¾" thread)

45 mm (1.772 in)Selecting the length of the insertion version
Select the length of the insertion version using the calculated insertion depth and thefollowing table. The insertion depth must be within the adjusting range of the insertion
version.
Length of insertion tube

Adjusting range (insertion depth)

[mm]

[in]

[mm]

[in]

235

9

100 to 235

3.9 to 9.3

335

13

100 to 335

3.9 to 13.2

435

17

100 to 435

3.9 to 17.1

608

24

100 to 608

3.9 to 23.9

Inlet and outlet runs
A fully developed flow profile is a requirement for optimal thermal flow measurement.
To achieve the best possible measuring performance, observe the following inlet and outlet
runs at the very minimum.
• In the case of bidirectional sensors, also observe the recommended inlet run in the
opposite direction.
• If several flow disturbances are present, use flow conditioners.
• Use flow conditioners if it is not possible to observe the required inlet runs.
• In the case of control valves, the amount of disturbance depends on the valve type andopening degree. The recommended inlet run for control valves is 50 × DN.
• In the case of very light gases (helium, hydrogen), the recommended inlet run must be
doubled.

Endress+Hauser

21

Mounting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

20 × DN

5 × DN

30 × DN

5 × DN

A0040193

4

Reduction

A00401925

20 × DN

Expansion

5 × DN

25 × DN

5 × DN

A0039441
A00394406

90° elbow

50 × DN

7

2 × 90° elbow

35 × DN

5 × DN

5 × DN

A0039445

8Control valve

A0039442

9

2 × 90 ° elbow, 3-dimensional

%

7
6
5
A

4

1

3
2
2

3

1
4

0
5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

DN

B
A0045846

 10
A
B
1
2
3
4

The additional measured error to be expected without flow conditioners depending on the disturbancetype and inlet run

Additional measured error (%)
Inlet run (DN)
2 × 90 ° elbow, 3-dimensional
Expansion
2 × 90° elbow
Reduction or 90° elbow

Flow conditioner
Use flow conditioners if it is not possible to observe the required inlet runs. Flow
conditioners improve the flow profile and therefore reduce the necessary inlet runs.
22

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Mounting

Mount the flow conditioner in flow direction in front of the measuring device.
Available in the following flange standards:• ASME B16.5 Cl. 150/Cl. 300• EN 1092-1 PN10/PN16/PN25/PN40• JIS B2220 10K/20K
Available in the following line sizes:• DN 80 (3")• DN 100 (4")• DN 150 (6")• DN 200 (8")• DN 250 (10")• DN 300 (12")

212A0039538

1
2

Flow conditioner
Seal

5 × DN

10 × DN

5 × DN

1
A0039424 111

Recommended inlet and outlet runs when using a flow conditioner

Flow conditioner

In the case of bidirectional sensors, also observe the inlet run in the opposite
direction.

Endress+Hauser

23

Mounting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

%

5
4
3

A

1
2

2
3
1
4
0
0

2

6

4

8

10

DN

B
A0039508

 12
A
B
1
2
3
4

The additional measured error to be expected with flow conditioners depending on the disturbance typeand inlet run

Additional measured error (%)
Inlet runs upstream of the flow conditioner (DN)
2 × 90 ° elbow, 3-dimensional
Expansion
2 × 90° elbow
Reduction or 90° elbow

The pressure loss for flow conditioners is calculated as follows: ∆ p [mbar] = 0.0085 ⋅ ρ[kg/m3] ⋅ v2 [m/s]
Example of air
p = 10 bar abs.
t = 25 °C → ρ = 11.71 kg/m3
v = 10 m/s∆ p = 0.0085 ⋅ 11.71 ⋅ 10 2 = 9.95 mbar
ρ : density of the process medium
v: average flow velocity
abs. = absolute

Outlet runs with pressure measuring points
Install the pressure measuring point downstream of the measuring system. This prevents
the pressure transmitter from potentially affecting the flow in the measuring point.

24

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Mounting

2 ... 5 x DN
P

A0039447

 13

Installation of a pressure measuring point (P = pressure transmitter)

Installation conditions for nipples
Suitable support brackets must be used if installing in rectangular air ducts (or pipes
with thin walls).

D

90° (± 3°)

90° (± 3°)

A0040684

DØ 31.0 ± 0.5 mm (1.22 ± 0.019 in)

5.1.2

Environment and process requirements

Ambient temperature range
Measuring device• –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)• Order code for "Test, certificate", option JP:–50 to +60 °C (–58 to +140 °F)

Readability of the local
display–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside thetemperature range.

NOTICE
Danger of overheating‣ Ensure that the temperature at the lower end of the transmitter housing does notexceed 80 °C (176 °F).
‣ Ensure that sufficient convection takes place at the transmitter neck.
‣ When using in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in thedevice-specific Ex documentation. For detailed information on the temperature tables,
see the separate document entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device.
‣ Ensure that a sufficiently large area of the transmitter neck remains exposed. The
uncovered part serves as a radiator and protects the electronics from overheating andexcessive cooling.

‣ If operating outdoors:
Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
You can order a weather protection cover from Endress+Hauser→  171.

Endress+Hauser

25

Mounting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

System pressure
Pressure-reducing valves and some compressor systems can generate significant processpressure variations that can distort the flow profile. This can produce an additional
measured error. Suitable measures must be taken to reduce these pressure pulses, such as:• The use of expansion tanks• The use of inlet diffusers• Positioning the measuring device further downstream
To avoid pulsating flow and contamination from oil/dirt in compressed air applications, it
is recommended to install the measuring device downstream of filter, drying and storage
devices. Do not install the measuring device directly after the compressor.
Thermal insulation
In the case of some fluids, it is important to keep the heat radiated from the sensor to thetransmitter to a low level. A wide range of materials can be used for the required
insulation.
If the gas is very wet or saturated with water (e.g. digester gas), the pipe and the sensor
housing should be insulated, and heated where necessary, to prevent water droplets
condensing on the sensing element.
NOTICE
Electronics overheating on account of thermal insulation!
‣ Recommended orientation: horizontal orientation, sensor connection housing pointing
downwards.
‣ Do not insulate the sensor connection housing.
‣ Maximum permissible temperature at the lower end of the sensor connection housing:
80 °C (176 °F)‣ Thermal insulation with not isolated extended neck: We recommend that you do not
insulate the extended neck in order to ensure optimum dissipation of heat.

A0039420

 14

Thermal insulation with not isolated extended neckHeating
NOTICE
Electronics can overheat due to elevated ambient temperature!
‣ Observe maximum permitted ambient temperature for the transmitter.
‣ Depending on the medium temperature, take the device orientation requirements into
account.
NOTICE
Electronics overheating on account of thermal insulation!
‣ Recommended orientation: horizontal orientation, sensor connection housing pointing
downwards.
‣ Do not insulate the sensor connection housing.
‣ Maximum permissible temperature at the lower end of the sensor connection housing:
80 °C (176 °F)‣ Thermal insulation with extended neck free: We recommend that you do not insulate
the extended neck in order to ensure optimum dissipation of heat.
26

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Mounting

NOTICE
Danger of overheating when heating‣ Ensure that the temperature at the lower end of the transmitter housing does notexceed 80 °C (176 °F).
‣ Ensure that sufficient convection takes place at the transmitter neck.
‣ When using in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in thedevice-specific Ex documentation. For detailed information on the temperature tables,
see the separate document entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device.
‣ Ensure that a sufficiently large area of the transmitter neck remains exposed. The
uncovered part serves as a radiator and protects the electronics from overheating andexcessive cooling.
Heating options
If a fluid requires that no heat loss should occur at the sensor, users can avail of thefollowing heating options:• Electrical heating, e.g. with electric band heaters• Via pipes carrying hot water or steam
Vibrations
NOTICE
Strong vibrations can damage the measuring device.
Can result in damage to the measuring device or the fastening units.
‣ Pay attention to information on the vibration and shock resistance →  191

5.1.3

Special mounting instructions

Zero adjust
All measuring devices are calibrated in accordance with state-of-the-art technology.
Calibration takes place under reference conditions . Therefore, a zero adjustment in thefield is generally not required.
Experience shows that zero adjustment is advisable only in special cases:• If strict measuring accuracy requirements apply.
• Under extreme process or operating conditions, e.g., very high process temperatures orlight gases (helium, hydrogen).

203 (8.0)

243 (9.6)

213 (8.4)

39 (1.5)

Weather protection coverA0029552

 15

Endress+Hauser

Weather protection cover for Proline 500; engineering unit mm (in)27

Mounting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

5.2

Mounting the measuring device

5.2.1

Required tool

For sensor
Sensor's compression fitting: appropriate mounting tool.

5.2.2

Preparing the measuring device

1.

Remove all remaining transport packaging.

2.

Remove any protective covers or protective caps present from the sensor.

3.

Remove stick-on label on the electronics compartment cover.

5.2.3

Mounting the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger due to improper process sealing!
‣ Ensure that the seals are clean and undamaged.
‣ Ensure that the correct sealing material is used (e.g. Teflon tape for NPT compression
fitting).
‣ Secure the seals correctly.
Install the measuring device or turn the transmitter housing so that the cable entries do
not point upwards.

A0029263

1.

Weld in the mounting boss in accordance with the requirements.

2.

Loosen the union nut (1) and push down the compression fitting (2).

1.
3 mm
3.

2.

36 mm
A0041023

28

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Mounting

3.

NOTICE
Damage to the sensing element!
‣ Make sure the sensing elements do not hit against anything.
Using a wrench (27 mm / 35 mm / 41 mm), tighten the bottom nut of thecompression fitting to the end stop.


27 mm / 35 mm / 41 mm
A0036810

4.

Now read off the previously calculated insertion depth from the scale and insert thesensor until this value is at the same height as the upper end of the compression
fitting.

5.

Tighten the union nut by hand. It should still be possible to move the sensor slightly.
A0041025

6.

Align the sensor with the flow direction.
 Pay attention to the direction of the arrow on the neck section of the sensor for
the flow direction.
The maximum permitted deviation from the flow direction is 3°.

90°(±3°)90°(±3°)!3(1. 1,022 ±0,
±0 5
.01
9

)

90°(±3°)

A0039512 16

7.

Endress+Hauser

Engineering unit: mm (in)Depending on the process connection:
Tighten union nut with x turns:
 For PEEK ferrules continue with Step 8.
For metal ferrules continue with Step 9.

29

Mounting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

8.

For PEEK ferrules:
Mounting for the first time: tighten union nut with 1¼ turns. Repeat mounting:tighten union nut with 1 turn.
 Tip If strong vibrations can be expected, tighten the union nut with 1½ turns
when mounting for the first time.

9.

For metal ferrules:
Mounting for the first time: tighten union nut with 1¼ turns. Repeat mounting:tighten union nut with ¼ turn.

10. Tighten both fixing screws again with a 3 mm (¹⁄₈ in) Allen screw with
4 Nm (2.95 lbf ft).
 It is now no longer possible to move the sensor.
11. Check the measuring point for leaks (max. process pressure).

5.2.4

Mounting the transmitter housing: Proline 500 – digital

LCAUTION
Ambient temperature too high!
Danger of electronics overheating and housing deformation.
‣ Do not exceed the permitted maximum ambient temperature .
‣ If operating outdoors: Avoid direct sunlight and exposure to weathering, particularly inwarm climatic regions.

LCAUTION
Excessive force can damage the housing!
‣ Avoid excessive mechanical stress.
The transmitter can be mounted in the following ways:• Post mounting• Wall mounting
Pipe mounting
Required tools:• Open-ended wrench AF 10• Torx screwdriver TX 25

LWARNING
Excessive tightening torque applied to the fixing screws!
Risk of damaging the plastic transmitter.
‣ Tighten the fixing screws as per the tightening torque: 2 Nm (1.5 lbf ft)

30

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Mounting

ø 20…70(ø 0.79…2.75)

4x

3x

TX 25

SW 10

~1

0

~4
2(

.0)

A0029051

 17

Engineering unit mm (in)Wall mounting
Required tools:
Drill with drill bit ⌀ 6.0 mm
17 (0.67)==

L

211 (8.31)

5.8 (0.23)

5.8 (0.23)
149 (5.85)
A0029054

 18
LEngineering unit mm (in)Depends on order code for "Transmitter housing"Order code for "Transmitter housing"• Option A, aluminum, coated: L = 14 mm (0.55 in)• Option D, polycarbonate: L = 13 mm (0.51 in)Endress+Hauser

1.

Drill the holes.

2.

Insert wall plugs into the drilled holes.

3.

Screw in the fixing screws slightly.

4.

Fit the transmitter housing over the fixing screws and mount in place.
31

Mounting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

5.

5.3

Tighten the fixing screws.

Post-installation check

Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)?



Does the measuring device conform to the measuring point specifications?
For example:• Process temperature →  193• Process pressure (refer to the "Pressure-temperature ratings" section of the "Technical
Information" document)• Ambient temperature →  25
• Measuring range →  177



Has the correct orientation been selected for the sensor →  19?
• According to sensor type
• According to medium properties• According to medium temperature• According to process pressure

32

Does the arrow on the sensor match the actual direction of flow of the medium through thepiping ?

Have sufficient inlet and outlet runs been provided upstream and downstream of the measuring
point →  21?

Correct sensor insertion depth?

Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight?

Is the device protected against overheating?

Is the device protected against excessive vibrations?



Gas property checked (e.g. purity, dryness, cleanness)?



Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)?



Are the securing screw and securing clamp tightened securely?

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Electrical connection

6

Electrical connection

LWARNING
Live parts! Incorrect work performed on the electrical connections can result in anelectric shock.
‣ Set up a disconnecting device (switch or power-circuit breaker) to easily disconnect thedevice from the supply voltage.
‣ In addition to the device fuse, include an overcurrent protection unit with max. 10 A in
the plant installation.

6.1

Electrical safety

In accordance with applicable national regulations.

6.2

Connection requirements

6.2.1

Required tools• For cable entries: use appropriate tool
• For securing clamp: Allen key 3 mm
• Wire stripper• When using stranded cables: crimper for wire end ferrule• For removing cables from terminal: flat blade screwdriver ≤ 3 mm (0.12 in)

6.2.2

Requirements for connection cable

The connecting cables provided by the customer must fulfill the following requirements.
Protective grounding cable for the outer ground terminal
Conductor cross-section < 2.1 mm2 (14 AWG)
The use of a cable lug enables the connection of larger cross-sections.
The grounding impedance must be less than 2 Ω.
Permitted temperature range• The installation guidelines that apply in the country of installation must be observed.
• The cables must be suitable for the minimum and maximum temperatures to be
expected.
Power supply cable (incl. conductor for the inner ground terminal)
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Signal cable
Current output 4 to 20 mA HARTA shielded cable is recommended. Observe grounding concept of the plant.
Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
Standard installation cable is sufficient
Pulse /frequency /switch output
Standard installation cable is sufficientEndress+Hauser

33

Electrical connection

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Relay output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA
Standard installation cable is sufficient
Status inputStandard installation cable is sufficient
Cable diameter• Cable glands supplied:
M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)• Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).
Choice of connecting cable between the transmitter and sensor
Depends on the type of transmitter and the installation zones

5
1

1

A
1

2
6

A
2

B
1
B

4

2

2

7
C

3

2

A0042081

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A

B

C

Proline 500 – digital transmitter
Sensor t-mass
Proline 300 transmitter
Remote display (DKX001)
Non-hazardous area
Hazardous area: Zone 2; Class I, Division 2
Hazardous area: Zone 1; Class I, Division 1
Standard cable to transmitter 500 – digital
Transmitter installed in the non-hazardous area or hazardous area: Zone 2; Class I, Division 2/sensor
installed in the hazardous area: Zone 2; Class I, Division 2Standard cable to transmitter 500 – digital →  35
Transmitter installed in the hazardous area: Zone 2; Class I, Division 2/sensor installed in the hazardous area:
Zone 1; Class I, Division 1
Standard cable to remote display
Transmitter 300 and remote display installed in the hazardous area: Zone 1; Class I, Division 1

For applications with operation in Zone 1; Class 1, Division 1, we recommend the useof the compact version with the remote display. In this case, the display of the Proline
300 transmitter is a blind version without local operation.
34

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Electrical connection

A: Connecting cable between sensor and transmitter: Proline 500 – digital
Standard cable
A standard cable with the following specifications can be used as the connecting cable.
Design4 cores; uninsulated stranded CU wires; with common shield

ShieldingTin-plated copper braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Loop resistancePower supply line (+, –): maximum 10 Ω

Cable length

Maximum 300 m (900 ft), see the following table.

Device plug, side 1

M12 socket, 5-pin, A-coded.

Device plug, side 2

M12 plug, 5-pin, A-coded.

Cross-section

Cable length [max.]

0.34 mm2 (AWG 22)

80 m (240 ft)

0.50 mm2 (AWG 20)

120 m (360 ft)

0.75 mm2 (AWG 18)

180 m (540 ft)

1.00 mm2 (AWG 17)

240 m (720 ft)

1.50 mm2 (AWG 15)

300 m (900 ft)

Optionally available connecting cable
Design2 × 2 × 0.34 mm2 (AWG 22) PVC cable 1) with common shield (2 pairs,
uninsulated stranded CU wires; pair-stranded)

Flame resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60332-1-2

Oil-resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60811-2-1

ShieldingTin-plated copper braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Operating temperature

When mounted in a fixed position: –50 to +105 °C (–58 to +221 °F); when cable
can move freely: –25 to +105 °C (–13 to +221 °F)

Available cable length

Fixed: 20 m (60 ft); variable: up to maximum 50 m (150 ft)

1)

UV radiation can impair the cable outer sheath. Protect the cable from direct sunshine where possible.

B: Connecting cable between sensor and transmitter: Proline 500 - digital
Standard cable
A standard cable with the following specifications can be used as the connecting cable.

Endress+Hauser

Design4, 6, 8 cores (2, 3, 4 pairs); uninsulated stranded CU wires; pair-stranded with
common shield

ShieldingTin-plated copper braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Capacitance C

Maximum 760 nF IIC, maximum 4.2 µF IIB

Inductance L

Maximum 26 µH IIC, maximum 104 µH IIB

Inductance/resistanceratio (L/R)

Maximum 8.9 µH/Ω IIC, maximum 35.6 µH/Ω IIB (e.g. according to IEC
60079-25)

Loop resistancePower supply line (+, –): maximum 5 Ω

Cable length

Maximum 100 m (300 ft), see the following table.

35

Electrical connection

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Cross-section

Cable length [max.]

Termination

2 x 2 x 0.50 mm2(AWG 20)50 m (150 ft)

2 x 2 x 0.50 mm2 (AWG 20)

BN WT YE GN

A
B
GY• +, – = 0.5 mm2• A, B = 0.5 mm2
3 x 2 x 0.50 mm2(AWG 20)3 x 2 x 0.50 mm2 (AWG 20)

100 m (300 ft)

BN WT GY PK YE GN

A
B
GY• +, – = 1.0 mm2• A, B = 0.5 mm2

Optionally available connecting cable
Connecting cable forZone 1; Class I, Division 1

Standard cable2 × 2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) PVC cable 1) with common shield (2 pairs, pairstranded)

Flame resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60332-1-2

Oil-resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60811-2-1

ShieldingTin-plated copper braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Operating temperature

When mounted in a fixed position: –50 to +105 °C (–58 to +221 °F); when cable
can move freely: –25 to +105 °C (–13 to +221 °F)

Available cable length

Fixed: 20 m (60 ft); variable: up to maximum 50 m (150 ft)

1)

UV radiation can impair the cable outer sheath. Protect the cable from direct sunshine where possible.

6.2.3

Terminal assignment

Transmitter: supply voltage, input/outputs
The terminal assignment of the inputs and outputs depends on the individual orderversion of the device. The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on anadhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage
1 (+)

2 (–)

Input/output
1
26 (+)

27 (–)

Input/output
2
24 (+)

25 (–)

Input/output
3
22 (+)

23 (–)

Input/output
4
20 (+)

21 (–)

Device-specific terminal assignment: adhesive label in terminal cover.

36

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Electrical connection

Transmitter and sensor connection housing: connecting cable
The sensor and transmitter, which are mounted in separate locations, are interconnectedby a connecting cable. The cable is connected via the sensor connection housing and thetransmitter housing.
Terminal assignment and connection of the connecting cable:
Proline 500 – digital →  38

6.2.4

Preparing the measuring device

Carry out the steps in the following order:
1.

Mount the sensor and transmitter.

2.

Sensor connection housing: Connect connecting cable.

3.

Transmitter: Connect connecting cable.

4.

Transmitter: Connect signal cable and cable for supply voltage.

NOTICE
Insufficient sealing of the housing!
Operational reliability of the measuring device could be compromised.
‣ Use suitable cable glands corresponding to the degree of protection.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Remove dummy plug if present.

2.

If the measuring device is supplied without cable glands:
Provide suitable cable gland for corresponding connecting cable.

3.

If the measuring device is supplied with cable glands:
Observe requirements for connecting cables →  33.

37

Electrical connection

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

6.3

Connecting the measuring device: Proline 500 –digitalNOTICEAn incorrect connection compromises electrical safety!
‣ Have electrical connection work carried out by appropriately trained specialists only.
‣ Observe applicable federal/national installation codes and regulations.
‣ Comply with local workplace safety regulations.
‣ Always connect the protective ground cable  before connecting additional cables.
‣ When using in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in thedevice-specific Ex documentation.

6.3.1

Connecting the connecting cable

LWARNING
Risk of damaging electronic components!
‣ Connect the sensor and transmitter to the same potential equalization.
‣ Only connect the sensor to a transmitter with the same serial number.
Connecting cable terminal assignment
1
2

3
5
6

+ – B A61 62 63 64

4

62 61 64 63

4

–

+

A

B

A0028198

1
2
3
4
5
6

Cable entry for cable on transmitter housing
Protective earth (PE)Connecting cable ISEM communication
Grounding via ground connection; on device plug versions grounding is through the plug itself
Cable entry for cable or connection of device plug on sensor connection housing
Protective earth (PE)Connecting the connecting cable to the sensor connection housing
Connection via terminals with order code for "Sensor connection housing":• Option A "Aluminum, coated" →  39
• Option L "Cast, stainless" →  39
Connecting the connecting cable to the transmitter
The cable is connected to the transmitter via terminals →  40.

38

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Electrical connection

Connecting the sensor connection housing via terminals
For the device version with the order code for "Sensor connection housing":• Option A "Aluminum coated"• Option L "Cast, stainless"2.
10 (0.4)

3 mm

1.

TX 20

5.
7.

22 mm

3.

24 mm

6.
A0029616

1.

Loosen the securing clamp of the housing cover.

2.

Unscrew the housing cover.

3.

Push the cable through the cable entry. To ensure tight sealing, do not remove thesealing ring from the cable entry.

4.

Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, fit ferrules.

5.

Connect the protective ground.

6.

Connect the cable in accordance with the connecting cable terminal assignment.

7.

Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the process for connecting the connecting cable.

LWARNING
Housing degree of protection voided due to insufficient sealing of the housing.
‣ Screw in the thread on the cover without using any lubricant. The thread on the cover iscoated with a dry lubricant.

Endress+Hauser

8.

Screw on the housing cover.

9.

Tighten the securing clamp of the housing cover.

39

Electrical connection

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Connecting the connecting cable to the transmitter
1. 4 x

3.

TX 20

2.

5.

8.

4.
10 (0.4)
22 mm
24 mm

7.

6.
A0029597

1.

Loosen the 4 fixing screws on the housing cover.

2.

Open the housing cover.

3.

Fold open the terminal cover.

4.

Push the cable through the cable entry. To ensure tight sealing, do not remove thesealing ring from the cable entry.

5.

Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, fit ferrules.

6.

Connect the protective ground.

7.

Connect the cable according to the terminal assignment for the connecting cable→  38.

8.

Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the process for connecting the connecting cable.

9.

Close the housing cover.

10. Tighten the securing screw of the housing cover.
11. After connecting the connecting cable:
Connect the signal cable and the supply voltage cable →  41.

40

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Electrical connection

6.3.2

Connecting the signal cable and the supply voltage cable1

2 3 6 4

5
A0028200

1
2
3
4
5
6

Terminal connection for supply voltage
Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output
Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output
Terminal connection for connecting cable between sensor and transmitter
Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output; optional: connection for external WLAN antenna
Protective earth (PE)

1. 4 x

3.

TX 20

2.

5.

8.

4.
10 (0.4)
22 mm
24 mm

7.

6.
A0029597

1.

Loosen the 4 fixing screws on the housing cover.

2.

Open the housing cover.

3.

Fold open the terminal cover.

4.

Push the cable through the cable entry. To ensure tight sealing, do not remove thesealing ring from the cable entry.

5.

Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, fit ferrules.

6.

Connect the protective ground.

7.

Connect the cable according to the terminal assignment.
 Signal cable terminal assignment: The device-specific terminal assignment isdocumented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage terminal assignment: Adhesive label in the terminal cover or→  36.

8.

Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the cable connection process.

9.

Close the terminal cover.

10. Close the housing cover.

Endress+Hauser

41

Electrical connection

Proline t-mass I 500 HARTLWARNING
Housing degree of protection may be voided due to insufficient sealing of the housing.

‣ Screw in the screw without using any lubricant.
LWARNING

Excessive tightening torque applied to the fixing screws!
Risk of damaging the plastic transmitter.
‣ Tighten the fixing screws as per the tightening torque: 2 Nm (1.5 lbf ft)
11. Tighten the 4 fixing screws on the housing cover.
Removing a cable
To remove a cable from the terminal:

3 (0.12)1.

2.

A0029598

 19Engineering unit mm (in)1.

Use a flat-blade screwdriver to press down on the slot between the two terminal
holes.

2.

Remove the cable end from the terminal.

6.4

Potential equalization

6.4.1

Requirements

For potential equalization:• Pay attention to in-house grounding concepts• Take account of operating conditions like the pipe material and grounding• Connect the medium, sensor and transmitter to the same electrical potential• Use a ground cable with a minimum cross-section of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2) and a cable lug
for potential equalization connections

42

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Electrical connection

6.5

Special connection instructions

6.5.1

Connection examples

Current output 4 to 20 mA HART
1

2

3
4...20 mA
6

4

5
A0029055

 20
1
2
3
4
5
6

Connection example for 4 to 20 mA HART current output (active)

Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Ground cable shield at one end. The cable shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with EMC
requirements; observe cable specifications →  188
Connection for HART operating devices →  69
Resistor for HART communication (≥ 250 Ω): observe maximum load →  182
Analog display unit: observe maximum load →  182
Transmitter

1

2

3

4

5
4...20 mA

A0028762

 21
1
2
3
4
5

Endress+Hauser

Connection example for 4 to 20 mA HART current output (passive)

Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Ground cable shield at one end. The cable shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with EMC
requirements; observe cable specifications
Analog display unit: observe maximum load →  182
Transmitter

43

Electrical connection

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

HART input
1

2

4

3

6
4...20 mA

5

2

3
A0028763

 22
1
2
3
4
5
6

Connection example for HART input with a common negative (passive)

Automation system with HART output (e.g. PLC)
Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N)
Ground cable shield at one end. The cable shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with EMC
requirements; observe cable specifications
Analog display unit: observe maximum load →  182
Pressure measuring device (e.g. Cerabar M, Cerabar S): observe requirements
Transmitter

Current output 4-20 mA
1

2

3
4...20 mA
A0028758

 23
1
2
3

Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (active)

Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Analog display unit: observe maximum load →  182
Transmitter

1

2

3

4
4...20 mA

A0028759

 24
1
2
3
4

44

Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (passive)

Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N)
Analog display unit: observe maximum load →  182
Transmitter

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Electrical connection

Pulse/frequency output

1

2

3

12345
A0028761

 25
1
2
3

Connection example for pulse/frequency output (passive)

Automation system with pulse/frequency input (e.g. PLC with 10 kΩ pull-up or pull-down resistor)
Power supply
Transmitter: observe input values →  183

Switch output

1

2

3

A0028760

 26
1
2
3

Connection example for switch output (passive)

Automation system with switch input (e.g. PLC with a 10 kΩ pull-up or pull-down resistor)
Power supply
Transmitter: observe input values →  183

Relay output

1

2

3

A0028760

 27
1
2
3

Endress+Hauser

Connection example for relay output (passive)

Automation system with relay input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: observe input values →  185

45

Electrical connection

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Current input
1

2

3

4

A0028915

 28
1
2
3
4

Connection example for 4 to 20 mA current input

Power supply
Terminal box
External measuring device (to read in pressure or temperature, for instance)
Transmitter

Status input

1

2

3

A0028764

 29
1
2
3

Connection example for status input

Automation system with status output (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter

6.6

Ensuring the degree of protection

The measuring device fulfills all the requirements for the degree of protection IP66/67,
Type 4X enclosure.
To guarantee the degree of protection IP66/67, Type 4X enclosure, carry out the following
steps after electrical connection:46

1.

Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly.

2.

Dry, clean or replace the seals if necessary.

3.

Tighten all housing screws and screw covers.

4.

Firmly tighten the cable glands.

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Electrical connection

5.

To ensure that moisture does not enter the cable entry:
Route the cable so that it loops down before the cable entry ("water trap").


6.

The cable glands supplied do not ensure housing protection when not in use. They
must therefore be replaced by dummy plus corresponding to the housing protection.

A0029278

6.6.1

Degree of protection IP68, Type 6P enclosure, with "Custpotted" option

Depending on the version, the sensor fulfills all the requirements for the degree ofprotection IP68 protection, Type 6P enclosure →  191 and can be used as a remotedevice version .
The degree of protection of the transmitter is always only IP66/67, Type 4X enclosure andthe transmitter must be treated accordingly .
To guarantee the degree of protection IP68, Type 6P enclosure for the "Cust-potted"
options, carry out the following steps after electrical connection:
1.

Firmly tighten the cable glands (torque: 2 to 3.5 Nm) until there is no gap between
the bottom of the cover and the housing support surface.

2.

Firmly tighten the union nut of the cable glands.

3.

Pot the field housing with a potting compound.

4.

Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly. Dry, clean or replace theseals if necessary.

5.

Tighten all housing screws and screw covers (torque: 20 to 30 Nm).

6.7

Post-connection check

Are cables or the device undamaged (visual inspection)?

Is the protective earthing established correctly?
Do the cables used comply with the requirements ?

Do the mounted cables have adequate strain relief?



Are all cable glands installed, securely tightened and leak-tight? Cable run with "water trap"→  46?

Is the terminal assignment correct ?

Are dummy plugs inserted in unused cable entries and have transportation plugs been replacedwith dummy plugs?

Endress+Hauser

47

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

7

Operation options

7.1

Overview of operation options

ESC

-

+

1

E

2

3

4

5

6
A0034513

1
2
3
4
5
6

48

Local operation via display module
Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS
Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM)
Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370
Field Xpert SMT70
Mobile handheld terminal
Control system (e.g. PLC)

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

7.2

Structure and function of the operating menu

7.2.1

Structure of the operating menu

For an overview of the operating menu for experts: see the "Description of Device
Parameters" document supplied with the device

Operating menu for operators and maintenances
Language
Operatation!
Language

Operator

Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Setup

Device tag

Wizard n / Parameter nAdvanced setup

Enter access code
Parameter 1

Task-oriented

Maintenance

Wizard 1 / Parameter 1

Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Diagnostics

Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu nOperating menu for experts
ExpertAccess status display
Parameter n

Sensor
Input
OutputCommunication

Function-oriented

ExpertSystemApplication
Diagnostics

A0018237-EN

 30

Endress+Hauser

Schematic structure of the operating menu

49

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

7.2.2

Operating philosophy

The individual parts of the operating menu are assigned to certain user roles (e.g.
operator, maintenance etc.). Each user role contains typical tasks within the device life
cycle.
Menu/parameter
Language

Taskoriented

Operation

Setup

User role and tasks

Content/meaning

Role "Operator", "Maintenance"
Tasks during operation:• Configuration of the operational
display• Read measured values• Define the operating language• Define the web server operating language• Reset and control totalizers"Maintenance" roleCommissioning:• Configuration of the measurement• Configuration of the inputs andoutputs• Configuration of the communicationinterface

Wizards for fast commissioning:• Configure the system units• Display the I/O configuration• Configure the inputs• Configure the outputs• Configuration of the operational display• Configure the low flow cut off• Configuration of the operational display (e.g. display format, display
contrast)• Reset and control totalizers

Advanced setup• For more customized configuration of the measurement (adaptation to
special measuring conditions)• Configuration of totalizers• Configuration of WLAN settings• Administration (define access code, reset measuring device)
Diagnostics

Expert50Functionoriented"Maintenance" role
Troubleshooting:• Diagnostics and elimination of process
and device errors• Measured value simulation

Contains all parameters for error detection and analyzing process and device
errors:• Diagnostic list
Contains up to 5 currently pending diagnostic messages.
• Event logbook
Contains event messages that have occurred.
• Device information
Contains information for identifying the device.
• Measured values
Contains all current measured values.
• Data logging submenu with the "Extended HistoROM" order option
Storage and visualization of measured values• Heartbeat Technology
The functionality of the device is checked on demand and the verification
results are documented.
• Simulation
Is used to simulate measured values or output values.

Tasks that require detailed knowledge ofthe operating principle of the device:• Commissioning measurements underdifficult conditions• Optimal adaptation of themeasurement to difficult conditions• Detailed configuration of thecommunication interface• Error diagnostics in difficult cases

Contains all the parameters of the device and makes it possible to accessthese parameters directly using an access code. The structure of this menu isbased on the function blocks of the device:• SystemContains all higher-level device parameters that do not pertain either tothe measurement or to measured value communication.
• Sensor
Configuration of the measurement.
• Input
Configuration of the status input.
• Output
Configuration of the analog current outputs as well as the pulse/frequency
and switch output.
• Communication
Configuration of the digital communication interface and the web server.
• Application
Configuration of the functions that go beyond the actual measurement(e.g. totalizer).
• Diagnostics
Error detection and analysis of process and device errors and for device
simulation and Heartbeat Technology.

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

7.3

Access to operating menu via local display

7.3.1

Operational display
1
2

F

XXXXXXXXX

4

31120.50kg/h

5A0029348

1
2
3
4
5

Operational display
Device tag
Status area
Display area for measured values (up to 4 lines)
Operating elements →  57

Status area
The following symbols appear in the status area of the operational display at the top right:• Status signals→  145• F: Failure• C: Function check• S: Out of specification• M: Maintenance required• Diagnostic behavior→  146• : Alarm• : Warning• : Locking (the device is locked via the hardware )• : Communication (communication via remote operation is active)
Display area
In the display area, each measured value is prefaced by certain symbol types for further
description:
Measured variable

Measurement channel
numberDiagnostic behavior

↓

↓

↓

ExampleAppears only if a diagnostics
event is present for thismeasured variable.

Measured variables
SymbolMeaning
Mass flow• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• FAD volume flow

Endress+Hauser

51

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Heat flow• Density• Reference density
Energy flow
Flow velocity
Calorific value
Temperature

The number and display format of the measured variables can be configured via theFormat display parameter (→  104).
Totalizer
SymbolMeaning
Totalizer
The measurement channel number indicates which of the three totalizers is displayed.

OutputSymbolMeaning
Output The measurement channel number indicates which of the outputs is displayed.
Input
SymbolMeaning
Status input

Measurement channel numbers
SymbolMeaning
Measurement channel 1 to 4
The measurement channel number is only displayed if more than one channel is present
for the same measured variable type (e.g. Totalizer 1 to 3).

Diagnostic behavior
SymbolMeaning
Alarm• Measurement is interrupted.
• Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition.
• A diagnostic message is generated.
Warning• Measurement is resumed.
• The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected.
• A diagnostic message is generated.

The diagnostic behavior pertains to a diagnostic event that is relevant to the displayedmeasured variable.

52

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

7.3.2

2

Navigation view
In the submenu

In the wizard

1

10091-1/../Operation
Access stat.disp

3

2

3

/../Select medium
Select medium

Operator
Locking status
Display

Gas
4

4

5

5
A0013993-EN

1
2
3
4
5

A0041841-EN

Navigation view
Navigation path to current position
Status area
Display area for navigation
Operating elements →  57

Navigation path
The navigation path to the current position is displayed at the top left in the navigation
view and consists of the following elements:• The display symbol for the menu/submenu ( ) or the wizard ( ).
• An omission symbol (/ ../) for operating menu levels in between.
• Name of the current submenu, wizard or parameter
Display symbol

Omission symbol

Parameter

↓

↓

↓

/ ../

Display

ExampleFor more information about the icons in the menu, refer to the "Display area" section→  53
Status area
The following appears in the status area of the navigation view in the top right corner:• In the submenu• The direct access code to the parameter (e.g., 0022-1)• If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal• In the wizard
If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal• For information on the diagnostic behavior and status signal →  145• For information on the function and entry of the direct access code →  59
Display area
Menus
SymbolMeaning
Operation
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Operation" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Operation menu

Endress+Hauser

53

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Setup
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Setup" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Setup menu
Diagnostics
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Diagnostics" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Diagnostics menu
ExpertAppears:• In the menu next to the "Expert" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Expert menu

Submenus, wizards, parameters
SymbolMeaning
Submenu
WizardParameters within a wizard

 No display symbol exists for parameters in submenus.
Locking
SymbolMeaningParameter locked
When displayed in front of a parameter name, indicates that the parameter is locked.
• By a user-specific access code
• By the hardware write protection switch

Wizard operation
SymbolMeaning
Switches to the previous parameter.
Confirms the parameter value and switches to the next parameter.
Opens the editing view of the parameter.

54

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

7.3.3

Editing view

Numeric editor
1

0
5
+

2

1
6
–

+0.000 Xx
2
3
8
7

4
9

3

4
A0034250

 31
1
2
3
4

For entering values in parameters (e.g. limit values)

Entry display area
Input screen
Confirm, delete or reject entry
Operating elements

Text editor
1

2

XxxxxxxA B C D E F G H I J K
L M N O P Q R S T U V W
X Y Z

6
7

3
5
4

A0034114

 32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

For entering text in parameters (e.g. device tag)

Entry display area
Current input screen
Change input screen
Operating elements
Move entry position
Delete entry
Reject or confirm entry

Using the operating elements in the editing viewOperating key

Meaning
Minus keyMove the entry position to the left.
Plus keyMove the entry position to the right.

Endress+Hauser

55

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operating key

MeaningEnter key
• Pressing the key briefly confirms your selection.
• Pressing the key for 2 s confirms your entry.

+

Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)
Close the editing view without accepting a change.

Input screens
SymbolMeaning
Upper case
Lower caseNumbers
Punctuation marks and special characters: = + – * / ² ³ ¼ ½ ¾ ( ) [ ] < > { }Punctuation marks and special characters: ' " `^. , ; : ? ! % µ ° € $ £ ¥ § @ # / \ I ~ & _Umlauts and accents

Controlling data entries
SymbolMeaningMove entry position
Reject entry
Confirm entry
Delete character immediately to the left of the entry position
Delete character immediately to the right of the entry position
Clear all the characters entered

56

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

7.3.4

Operating elements

Operating key

Meaning
Minus key
In menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar upwards in a picklist.
With a wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the previous parameter.
In the text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the left.
Plus key
In menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar downwards in a picklist.
With a wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the next parameter.
In the text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the right.
Enter key
With an operational display
Pressing the key briefly opens the operating menu.
In menu, submenu• Pressing the key briefly:• Opens the selected menu, submenu or parameter.
• Starts the wizard.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s for parameter:
If present, opens the help text for the function of the parameter.
With a Wizard
Opens the editing view of the parameter.
In the text and numeric editor• Pressing the key briefly confirms your selection.
• Pressing the key for 2 s confirms your entry.
Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)
In menu, submenu• Pressing the key briefly:• Exits the current menu level and takes you to the next higher level.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s returns you to the operational display ("home position").

+With a wizard
Exits the wizard and takes you to the next higher level.
In the text and numeric editor
Exits the Editing view without applying the changes.
Minus/Enter key combination (press and hold down the keys simultaneously)• If keypad lock is active:
Pressing the key for 3 s deactivates the keypad lock.
• If keypad lock is not active:
Pressing the key for 3 s opens the context menu including the option for activating the
keypad lock.

+

7.3.5

Opening the context menu

Using the context menu, the user can call up the following menus quickly and directly fromthe operational display:• Setup• Data backup• Simulation

Endress+Hauser

57

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Calling up and closing the context menu
The user is in the operational display.
1.

Press the  and  keys for longer than 3 seconds.
 The context menu opens.
XXXXXXXXXX
Setup
Conf.backup
Simulation
Keylock on

l/hA0034608-EN

2.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The context menu is closed and the operational display appears.

Calling up the menu via the context menu

58

1.

Open the context menu.

2.

Press  to navigate to the desired menu.

3.

Press  to confirm the selection.
 The selected menu opens.

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

7.3.6

Navigating and selecting from list

Different operating elements are used to navigate through the operating menu. The
navigation path is displayed on the left in the header. Icons are displayed in front of theindividual menus. These icons are also shown in the header during navigation.
For an explanation of the navigation view with symbols and operating elements→  53
Example: Setting the number of displayed measured values to "2 values"
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
1.

0104-1Main menu
Language

EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup

2.

Main menu
Language
Display/operat.
Setup/ ../Display/operat.

0091-1

Access stat.disp

3.

Operator
Locking status
Display/ ../Display/operat.
Locking status
Display4.

/ ../Display

0098-1

Format display
1 value, max.
Contrast display
Display intervall

5.

/ ../Format display
1 value, max.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.

6.

0098-1/ ../Format display
1 value, max.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.

7.

0098-1XXXXXXXXX

8.

2s

10.50
mA
2800
Hz
A0029562-EN

7.3.7

Calling the parameter directly

A parameter number is assigned to every parameter to be able to access a parameter
directly via the onsite display. Entering this access code in the Direct access parameter
calls up the desired parameter directly.
Navigation path
Expert → Direct accessEndress+Hauser

59

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

The direct access code consists of a 5-digit number (at maximum) and the channel
number, which identifies the channel of a process variable: e.g. 00914-2. In the navigation
view, this appears on the right-hand side in the header of the selected parameter.
00914-2

1

A0029414

1

Direct access code

Note the following when entering the direct access code:• The leading zeros in the direct access code do not have to be entered.
Example: Enter "914" instead of "00914"• If no channel number is entered, channel 1 is opened automatically.
Example: Enter 00914 → Assign process variable parameter• If a different channel is opened: Enter the direct access code with the corresponding
channel number.
Example: Enter 00914-2 → Assign process variable parameter
For the direct access codes of the individual parameters, see the "Description of Device
Parameters" document for the device

7.3.8

Calling up help text

Help text is available for some parameters and can be called up from the navigation view.
The help text provides a brief explanation of the parameter function and thereby supports
swift and safe commissioning.
Calling up and closing the help text
The user is in the navigation view and the selection bar is on a parameter.
1.

Press  for 2 s.
 The help text for the selected parameter opens.
Ent. access code
Enter access code to disable
write protec.

A0014002-EN

 33

2.

Example: Help text for parameter "Enter access code"

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The help text is closed.

7.3.9

Changing the parameters

Parameters can be changed via the numeric editor or text editor.
• Numeric editor: Change values in a parameter, e.g. specifications for limit values.
• Text editor: Enter text in a parameter, e.g. tag name.
A message is displayed if the value entered is outside the permitted value range.

60

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

Ent. access code
Invalid or out of range input
value
Min:0
Max:9999
A0014049-EN

For a description of the editing view - consisting of the text editor and numeric editor- with symbols →  55, for a description of the operating elements →  57

7.3.10User roles and related access authorization

The two user roles "Operator" and "Maintenance" have different write access to theparameters if the customer defines a user-specific access code. This protects the device
configuration via the local display from unauthorized access →  126.
Defining access authorization for user roles
An access code is not yet defined when the device is delivered from the factory. Accessauthorization (read and write access) to the device is not restricted and corresponds to the"Maintenance" user role.

‣ Define the access code.
 The "Operator" user role is redefined in addition to the "Maintenance" user role.
Access authorization differs for the two user roles.
Access authorization to parameters: "Maintenance" user role
Access code status

Read access

Write accessAn access code has not yet been defined(factory setting).



After an access code has been defined.



 1)

1)

The user only has write access after entering the access code.

Access authorization to parameters: "Operator" user role
Access code status
After an access code has been defined.
1)

Read access

Write access



– 1)

Despite the defined access code, certain parameters can always be modified and thus are excluded fromthe write protection as they do not affect the measurement: write protection via access code →  126

The user role with which the user is currently logged on is indicated by the Accessstatus parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access status

7.3.11Disabling write protection via access code

If the -symbol appears on the local display in front of a parameter, the parameter iswrite-protected by a user-specific access code and its value cannot be changed at the
moment using local operation →  126.
Parameter write protection via local operation can be disabled by entering the user-specificaccess code in the Enter access code parameter (→  107) via the respective access
option.
1.

Endress+Hauser

After you press , the input prompt for the access code appears.

61

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

2.

Enter the access code.
 The -symbol in front of the parameters disappears; all previously writeprotected parameters are now re-enabled.

7.3.12

Enabling and disabling the keypad lockThe keypad lock makes it possible to block access to the entire operating menu via local
operation. As a result, it is no longer possible to navigate through the operating menu orchange the values of individual parameters. Users can only read the measured values on
the operational display.
The keypad lock is switched on and off via the context menu.
Switching on the keypad lockThe keypad lock is switched on automatically:• If the device has not been operated via the display for > 1 minute.
• Each time the device is restarted.
To activate the keylock manually:1.

The device is in the measured value display.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 A context menu appears.

2.

In the context menu select the Keylock on option.
 The keypad lock is switched on.
If the user attempts to access the operating menu while the keypad lock is active, theKeylock on message appears.

Switching off the keypad lock

‣ The keypad lock is switched on.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 The keypad lock is switched off.

7.4

Access to operating menu via web browser

7.4.1

Function range

With the integrated web server, the device can be operated and configured via a web
browser service interface (CDI-RJ45) or WLAN interface. The structure of the operating
menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values, status
information on the device is displayed and can be used to monitor device health.
Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters can be
configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication bycomputer or a mobile handheld terminal.
For additional information on the web server, refer to the Special Documentation forthe device (Verweisziel existiert nicht, aber @y.link.required='true')→  206

62

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

7.4.2

Requirements

Computer hardware
Hardware

Interface
CDI-RJ45

WLAN

Interface

The computer must have a RJ45
interface. 1)

The operating unit must have a WLAN
interface.

Connection

Standard Ethernet cable

Connection via Wireless LAN.

ScreenRecommended size: ≥12" (depends on the screen resolution)

1)

Recommended cable: CAT5e, CAT6 or CAT7, with shielded plug (e.g. YAMAICHI product; part no. YConProfixPlug63/Prod. ID: 82-006660)

Computer software
Software

Interface
CDI-RJ45

Recommended operating
systems

WLAN• Microsoft Windows 8 or higher.
• Mobile operating systems:• iOS• Android Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 7 is supported.
Web browsers supported• Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher• Microsoft Edge
• Mozilla Firefox• Google Chrome• SafariComputer settings
Settings

Interface
CDI-RJ45

WLAN

User rights

Appropriate user rights (e.g. administrator rights) for TCP/IP and proxy server
settings are necessary (e.g. for adjusting the IP address, subnet mask etc.).

Proxy server settings of the
web browser

The web browser's Use a Proxy Server for Your LAN setting must be
deselected .

JavaScript

JavaScript must be enabled.
JavaScript cannot be enabled: IfEnter
http://192.168.1.212/servlet/basic.html in the address bar of the
web browser. A fully functional but simplified version of the operating
menu structure starts in the web browser.
installing a new firmware version: WhenTo enable correct data display, clear the temporary memory (cache)under Internet options in the web browser.

Network connections

Use only the active network connections for the measuring device.
Switch off all other network
connections such as WLAN for
example.

Switch off all other network
connections.

In the event of connection problems: →  141

Endress+Hauser

63

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Measuring device: Via CDI-RJ45 service interface
Device

CDI-RJ45 service interface

Measuring device

The measuring device has an RJ45 interface.

Web server

Web server must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  68
Measuring device: via WLAN interface
DeviceWLAN interface

Measuring device

The measuring device has a WLAN antenna:• Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna• Transmitter with external WLAN antenna

Web server

Web server and WLAN must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  68
7.4.3

Establishing a connection

Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
Preparing the measuring device
Configuring the Internet protocol of the computer
The following information refers to the default Ethernet settings of the device.
IP address of the device: 192.168.1.212 (factory setting)1.

Switch on the measuring device.

2.

Connect the computer to the RJ45 plug via the standard Ethernet cable →  70.

3.

If a 2nd network card is not used, close all the applications on the notebook.
 Applications requiring Internet or a network, such as e-mail, SAP applications,Internet or Windows Explorer.

4.

Close any open Internet browsers.

5.

Configure the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) as defined in the table:

IP address

192.168.1.XXX; for XXX all numerical sequences except: 0, 212 and 255 → e.g.
192.168.1.213

Subnet mask

255.255.255.0

Default gateway

192.168.1.212 or leave cells empty

Via WLAN interface
Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.

64

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

NOTICE
Note the following to avoid a network conflict:‣ Avoid accessing the measuring device simultaneously from the same mobile terminal
via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal‣ Enable WLAN on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a WLAN connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1.

In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_t-mass_500_A802000).

2.

If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.

3.

Enter the password:
Serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g. L100A802000).
 The LED on the display module flashes. It is now possible to operate themeasuring device with the web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Terminating the WLAN connection‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the mobile terminal and measuring device.
Starting the Web browser
1.

Endress+Hauser

Start the Web browser on the computer.

65

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

2.

Enter the IP address of the web server in the address line of the web browser:
192.168.1.212
 The login page appears.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7
8
9
10
A0029417

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Picture of device
Device name
Device tag (→  82)
Status signal
Current measured values
Operating language
User role
Access code
Login
Reset access code (→  116)

If a login page does not appear, or if the page is incomplete →  141

7.4.4

Logging on

1.

Select the preferred operating language for the Web browser.

2.

Enter the user-specific access code.

3.

Press OK to confirm your entry.

Access code

0000 (factory setting); can be changed by customer

If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to
the login page.

66

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

7.4.5

User interface

1
2

3
A0029418

1
2
3Function row
Local display language
Navigation area

Header
The following information appears in the header:• Device name• Device tag• Device status with status signal →  148• Current measured values
Function row
Functions

Meaning

Measured values

Displays the measured values of the device

Menu• Access to the operating menu from the measuring device• The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display
information on the structure of the operating menu: see the Description of Detailed
Device Parameters

Device status

Displays the diagnostic messages currently pending, listed in order of priority

Data
management

Data exchange between computer and measuring device:• Device configuration:• Load settings from the device(XML format, save configuration)• Save settings to the device(XML format, restore configuration)• Logbook - Export Event logbook (.csv file)• Documents - Export documents:• Export backup data record(.csv file, create documentation of the measuring point configuration)• Verification report(PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat Verification" application package)• Firmware update - Flashing a firmware version

Network

Configuration and checking of all the parameters required for establishing the connection to
the measuring device:• Network settings (e.g. IP address, MAC address)• Device information (e.g. serial number, firmware version)

Logout

End the operation and call up the login page

Navigation area
The menus, the associated submenus and parameters can be selected in the navigation
area.

Endress+Hauser

67

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Working area
Depending on the selected function and the related submenus, various actions can be
performed in this area:• Configuring parameters• Reading measured values• Calling up help text
• Starting an upload/download

7.4.6

Disabling the Web server

The Web server of the measuring device can be switched on and off as required using the
Web server functionality parameter.
Navigation"Expert" menu → Communication → Web server
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Web server functionality

Description
Switch the Web server on and off.

Selection• Off• HTML Off• On

Function scope of the "Web server functionality" parameter
OptionDescription

Off• The Web server is completely disabled.
• Port 80 is locked.

On• The complete Web server functionality is available.
• JavaScript is used.
• The password is transferred in an encrypted state.
• Any change to the password is also transferred in an encrypted state.

Enabling the Web server
If the Web server is disabled it can only be re-enabled with the Web server functionality
parameter via the following operating options:• Via local display• Via Bedientool "FieldCare"• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool

7.4.7

Logging out

Before logging out, perform a data backup via the Data management function(upload configuration from device) if necessary.

68

1.

Select the Logout entry in the function row.
 The home page with the Login box appears.

2.

Close the Web browser.

3.

If no longer needed:
Reset the modified properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) →  64.

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

7.5

Access to the operating menu via the operating tool

The structure of the operating menu in the operating tools is the same as for operation via
the local display.

7.5.1

Connecting the operating tool

Via HART protocol
This communication interface is available in device versions with a HART output.

8
4

1

2

7

3

5

6
A0028747

 34
1
2
3

4
5
6
7
8

Endress+Hauser

Options for remote operation via HART protocol (active)

Control system (e.g. PLC)
Field Communicator 475
Computer with web browser (e.g. Microsoft Edge) to access the integrated device web server or computer with
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM) with COM DTM "CDI
Communication TCP/IP"
Commubox FXA195 (USB)
Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370
Field Xpert SMT70
VIATOR Bluetooth modem with connecting cable
Transmitter

69

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

10
3

2

1

6

4

9

5

7

8
A0028746

 35
1
2
3
4
5

6
7
8
9
10

Options for remote operation via HART protocol (passive)

Control system (e.g. PLC)
Transmitter power supply unit, e.g. RN221N (with communication resistor)
Connection for Commubox FXA195 and Field Communicator 475
Field Communicator 475
Computer with web browser (e.g. Microsoft Edge) to access the integrated device web server or computer with
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM) with COM DTM "CDI
Communication TCP/IP"
Commubox FXA195 (USB)
Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370
Field Xpert SMT70
VIATOR Bluetooth modem with connecting cable
Transmitter

Service interface
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
A point-to-point connection can be established to configure the device on site. With the
housing open, the connection is established directly via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) of
the device.
An adapter for the RJ45 to the M12 plug is optionally available for the non-hazardous
area:
Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 plug mounted in thecable entry. The connection to the service interface can be established via an M12
plug without opening the device.
Proline 500 – digital transmitter

1
open
press

3

2

A0029163

 36
1
2
3

70

Connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

Computer with web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) to access the integrated web
server or with an operating tool "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
Standard Ethernet connecting cable with RJ45 plug
Service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the measuring device with access to the integrated web serverEndress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

Via WLAN interface
The optional WLAN interface is available on the following device version:
Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch control + WLAN"
Function

WLAN: IEEE 802.11 b/g (2.4 GHz)

Encryption

WPA2-PSK AES-128 (in accordance with IEEE 802.11i)

Configurable WLAN channels

1 to 11Degree of protection

IP67

Available antennas• Internal antenna• External antenna (optional)
In the event of poor transmission/reception conditions at the place ofinstallation.

 Only 1 antenna is active at any one time!
Range• Internal antenna: typically 10 m (32 ft)• External antenna: typically 50 m (164 ft)

Materials (external antenna)• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylonitrile styrene acrylate) and nickel-plated
brass• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass• Cable: Polyethylene• Plug: Nickel-plated brass• Angle bracket: Stainless steel

Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICE
Note the following to avoid a network conflict:‣ Avoid accessing the measuring device simultaneously from the same mobile terminal
via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal‣ Enable WLAN on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a WLAN connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1.

In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_t-mass_500_A802000).

2.

If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.

3.

Enter the password:
Serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g. L100A802000).
 The LED on the display module flashes. It is now possible to operate themeasuring device with the web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Endress+Hauser

71

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Terminating the WLAN connection‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the mobile terminal and measuring device.

7.5.2

Field Xpert SFX350, SFX370

Function scope
Field Xpert SFX350 and Field Xpert SFX370 are mobile computers for commissioning andmaintenance. They enable efficient device configuration and diagnostics for HART and
FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices in the non-hazardous area (SFX350, SFX370) andhazardous area (SFX370).
For details, see Operating Instructions BA01202S
Source for device description files
See information →  75

7.5.3

FieldCare

Function range
FDT-based (Field Device Technology) plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser.
It can configure all smart field units in a system and helps you manage them. By using thestatus information, it is also a simple but effective way of checking their status andcondition.
Access is via:
• HART protocol →  69
• CDI-RJ45 service interface →  70
• WLAN interface →  71
Typical functions:• Transmitter parameter configuration• Loading and saving of device data (upload/download)• Documentation of the measuring point• Visualization of the measured value memory (line recorder) and event logbook• Operating Instructions BA00027S• Operating Instructions BA00059S
Source for device description files →  75
Establishing a connection

72

1.

Start FieldCare and launch the project.

2.

In the network: Add a device.
 The Add device window opens.

3.

Select the CDI Communication TCP/IP option from the list and press OK to confirm.

4.

Right-click CDI Communication TCP/IP and select the Add device option in thecontext menu that opens.

5.

Select the desired device from the list and press OK to confirm.
 The CDI Communication TCP/IP (Configuration) window opens.

6.

Enter the device address in the IP address field: 192.168.1.212 and press Enter toconfirm.

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation options

7.

Establish the online connection to the device.
• Operating Instructions BA00027S• Operating Instructions BA00059S

User interface
2

4

3

6

5

7

Xxxxxx/…/…/

1

Device name:

Xxxxxxx

Mass flow:

12.34

kg/h

Device tag:

Xxxxxxx

Volume flow:

12.34

m³/h

Status:Good

XxxxxxAccess status tooling+
Operation
P

–

Setup
Device tag–
System unitsP
Mass flow unit
P
Volume flow unit+
Select medium
P

8

+

…

+

…

+

Maintenance

Mass flow unit:

kg/hVolume flow unit:m³/h

Xxxxxx
kg/h
m³/h

9

Advanced setup+

Diagnostics+

Expert10

11A0021051-EN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

HeaderPicture of device
Device name
Device tag
Status area with status signal →  148
Display area for current measured values
Editing toolbar with additional functions such as save/load, event list and create documentation
Navigation area with operating menu structure
Work area
Action area
Status area

7.5.4

DeviceCare

Function range
Tool for connecting and configuring Endress+Hauser field devices.
The fastest way to configure Endress+Hauser field devices is with the dedicated"DeviceCare" tool. Together with the device type managers (DTMs) it presents a convenient,comprehensive solution.
Innovation brochure IN01047S
Source for device description files →  75

Endress+Hauser

73

Operation options

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

7.5.5

AMS Device Manager

Function range
Program from Emerson Process Management for operating and configuring measuring
devices via the HART protocol.
Source for device description files →  75

7.5.6

Field Communicator 475

Function scope
Industrial handheld terminal from Emerson Process Management for remoteconfiguration and measured value display via HART protocol.
Source for device description files
See information →  75

7.5.7

SIMATIC PDM

Function range
SIMATIC PDM is a standardized, manufacturer-independent program from Siemens forthe operation, configuration, maintenance and diagnosis of intelligent field devices via
HART protocol.
Source for device description files →  75

74

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

System integration

8

System integration

8.1

Overview of device description files

8.1.1

Current version data for the device

Firmware version

01.00.zz• On the title page of the Operating Instructions• On the transmitter nameplate →  15
• Firmware version parameter
Diagnostics → Device information → Firmware
versionRelease date of firmware version

07.2020---

Manufacturer ID

0x11

Manufacturer ID parameter
Expert → Communication → HART output→ Information → Manufacturer ID

Device type ID

0x1166

Device type parameter
Expert → Communication → HART output→ Information → Device type

HART protocol revision

7.0

---

Device revision

0x1• On the transmitter nameplate• Device revision parameter
Expert → Communication → HART output→ Information → Device revision

For an overview of the various firmware versions for the device →  166

8.1.2

Operating tools

The suitable device description file for the individual operating tools is listed in the tablebelow, along with information on where the file can be acquired.
Operating tool via
HART protocol

Sources for obtaining device descriptions

FieldCare• www.endress.com → Downloads area
• USB stick (contact Endress+Hauser)• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

DeviceCare• www.endress.com → Downloads area
• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)• Field Xpert SMT70• Field Xpert SMT77

Use update function of handheld terminal

AMS Device Manager(Emerson Process Management)www.endress.com → Downloads area

SIMATIC PDM(Siemens)

www.endress.com → Downloads area

Field Communicator 475(Emerson Process Management)

Use update function of handheld terminal

8.2

Measured variables via HART protocol

The following measured variables (HART device variables) are assigned to the dynamic
variables at the factory:

Endress+Hauser

75

System integration

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Dynamic variables

Measured variables(HART device variables)

Primary dynamic variable (PV)Mass flow

Secondary dynamic variable (SV)Totalizer

Tertiary dynamic variable (TV)

Volume flow

Quaternary dynamic variable (QV)

Corrected volume flow

The assignment of the measured variables to the dynamic variables can be modified andassigned as desired via local operation and the operating tool using the following
parameters:• Expert → Communication → HART output → Output → Assign PV• Expert → Communication → HART output → Output → Assign SV• Expert → Communication → HART output → Output → Assign TV• Expert → Communication → HART output → Output → Assign QV
The following measured variables can be assigned to the dynamic variables:
Measured variables for PV (primary dynamic variable)• Temperature• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Energy flow
• Heat flow
• Density• Flow velocity• Pressure• 2nd temperature delta heat
• Electronic temperature
Measured variables for SV, TV, QV (secondary, tertiary and quaternary dynamic
variable)• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Volume flow
• Temperature• Density• Flow velocity• Pressure• Energy flow
• Heat flow
• 2nd temperature delta heat
• Electronic temperature• Totalizer• HART input

8.2.1

Device variables

Device variables are permanently assigned. A maximum of eight device variables can betransmitted.

76

Allocation

Device variables

0

Mass flow

1

Volume flow

2

Corrected volume flow3

Density4

Reference density

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

System integration

Allocation

Device variables

5

Temperature

6

Totalizer 1

7

Totalizer 2

8

Totalizer 3

8.3

Other settings

Burst mode functionality in accordance with HART 7 Specification:
Navigation"Expert" menu → Communication → HART output → Burst configuration → Burstconfiguration 1 to n

‣ Burst configuration 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Burst mode 1 to n

→  78Burst command 1 to n

→  78Burst variable 0→  78Burst variable 1→  78Burst variable 2→  78Burst variable 3→  78Burst variable 4→  78Burst variable 5→  78Burst variable 6→  78Burst variable 7→  78Burst trigger mode→  78Burst trigger level→  78Min. update period→  79Max. update period→  7977

System integration

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection / User entry

Burst mode 1 to n

Activate the HART burst mode for burst message X.

• Off
• On

Burst command 1 to n

Select the HART command that is sent to the HART master.

• Command 1• Command 2• Command 3• Command 9• Command 33• Command 48

Burst variable 0

For HART command 9 and 33: select the HART device variableor the process variable.

• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• FAD volume flow *• Volume flow
• Temperature• Density• Flow velocity• Pressure• Energy flow *• Heat flow *• 2nd temperature delta heat *• Electronic temperature• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Percent of range• Measured current• Current input 1 *• Current input 2 *• Current input 3 *• Primary variable (PV)• Secondary variable (SV)• Tertiary variable (TV)• Quaternary variable (QV)
• HART input• Not used

Burst variable 1

For HART command 9 and 33: select the HART device variableor the process variable.

See the Burst variable 0 parameter.

Burst variable 2

For HART command 9 and 33: select the HART device variableor the process variable.

See the Burst variable 0 parameter.

Burst variable 3

For HART command 9 and 33: select the HART device variableor the process variable.

See the Burst variable 0 parameter.

Burst variable 4

For HART command 9: select the HART device variable or theprocess variable.

See the Burst variable 0 parameter.

Burst variable 5

For HART command 9: select the HART device variable or theprocess variable.

See the Burst variable 0 parameter.

Burst variable 6

For HART command 9: select the HART device variable or theprocess variable.

See the Burst variable 0 parameter.

Burst variable 7

For HART command 9: select the HART device variable or theprocess variable.

See the Burst variable 0 parameter.

Burst trigger mode

Select the event that triggers burst message X.

• Continuous• Window *• Rising *• Falling *• On change

Burst trigger level

Enter the burst trigger value.

Signed floating-point number

Together with the option selected in the Burst trigger modeparameter the burst trigger value determines the time of burst
message X.

78

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

System integration

Parameter

Description

Selection / User entry

Min. update period

Enter the minimum time span between two burst commands ofburst message X.

Positive integer

Max. update period

Enter the maximum time span between two burst commands ofburst message X.

Positive integer*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

79Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

9

Commissioning

9.1

Post-mounting and post-connection check

Before commissioning the device:‣ Make sure that the post-installation and post-connection checks have been performed
successfully.

• Checklist for "Post-mounting" check→  32
• Checklist for "Post-connection check" →  47

9.2

Switching on the measuring device‣ Switch on the device upon successful completion of the post-mounting and post-connection check.
 After a successful startup, the local display switches automatically from the startup
display to the operational display.
If nothing appears on the local display or if a diagnostic message is displayed, refer tothe section on "Diagnostics and troubleshooting" →  140.

9.3

Setting the operating language

Factory setting: English or ordered local language
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX

1.

XX
Main menu
Display language

0104-1EnglishOperation
Setup

2.

Display language
Ã English
DeutschEspañol
Français3.

4.

0104-1

Display language
Ã English
DeutschEspañol
Français
Hauptmenü
Sprache0104-10104-1
DeutschBetrieb
Setup
A0029420

 37

80

Taking the example of the local display

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

9.4

Configuring the measuring device

The Setup menu with its guided wizards contains all the parameters needed for standard
operation.
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
Main menu
Display language

1.

0104-1EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
Setup

2.

Diagnostic/ ../Setup
Medium selection

3.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
A0032222-EN

 38

Navigation to "Setup" menu using the example of the local display

The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operating Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device ("Supplementary documentation" ).

 Setup
Device tag→  82‣ Measurement mode→  82‣ Reference conditions→  86‣ Sensor adjustment→  87‣ System units→  88‣ I/O configuration→  90‣ Current input 1 to n

→  91‣ Status input 1 to n
‣ Current output 1 to n

→  93‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output→  96

1 to nEndress+Hauser

81Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

9.4.1

‣ Relay output 1 to n

→  102‣ Display→  103‣ Low flow cut off→  106‣ Advanced setup→  107

Defining the tag nameTo enable fast identification of the measuring point within the system, you can enter aunique designation using the Device tag parameter and thus change the factory setting.
1

XXXXXXXXX

A0029422

 39
1

Header of the operational display with tag nameTag nameEnter the tag name in the "FieldCare" operating tool →  73
Navigation"Setup" menu → Device tag
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Device tag

Description
Enter the name for the measuring point.

9.4.2

User entry
Max. 32 characters, such as letters, numbers
or special characters (e.g. @, %, /).

Configuring the measurement mode

Properties of the medium can be configured in the Measurement mode submenu.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Measurement mode

‣ Measurement mode

82

Measurement application→  84

Select gas type→  84Gas→  84

Gas composition→  84Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Endress+Hauser

Commissioning

Mol% Air→  84

Mol% Ar→  85

Mol% C2H4→  85

Mol% C2H6→  85

Mol% C3H8→  85

Mol% CH4→  85

Mol% Cl2→  85

Mol% CO→  85

Mol% CO2→  85

Mol% H2→  85

Mol% H2O→  85

Mol% H2S→  85

Mol% HCl→  85

Mol% He→  85

Mol% Kr→  85

Mol% N2→  85

Mol% n-C4H10→  85

Mol% Ne→  86

Mol% NH3→  86

Mol% O2→  86

Mol% O3→  86

Mol% Xe→  86

Special gas name→  8683

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Measurement application–

Select measurement
application.

• Air or compressed
air• Gas or gas mixture• Energy–

Select gas type–

Select measured gas type.

• Single gas• Gas mixture• Special gas *–Gas

The Single gas option is
selected in the Select gas typeparameter parameter.

Select measured gas.

• Air
• Ammonia NH3• Argon Ar• Butane C4H10• Carbon dioxide
CO2• Carbon monoxideCO• Chlorine Cl2• Ethane C2H6
• Ethylene C2H4
• Helium He• Hydrogen H2• Hydrogen chloride
HCl• Hydrogen sulfide
H2S• Krypton Kr• Methane CH4• Neon Ne• Nitrogen N2• Oxygen O2• Ozone O3• Propane C3H8
• Xenon Xe–

Gas composition

The Gas mixture option is
selected in the Select gas typeparameter parameter.

Select measured gas mixture.

• Air• Hydrogen H2• Helium He• Neon Ne• Argon Ar• Krypton Kr• Xenon Xe• Nitrogen N2• Oxygen O2• Chlorine Cl2• Ammonia NH3• Carbon monoxide
CO• Carbon dioxide
CO2• Hydrogen sulfide
H2S• Hydrogen chloride
HCl• Methane CH4• Propane C3H8
• Ethane C2H6
• Butane C4H10• Ethylene C2H4
• Water• Ozone O3–

Mol% Air–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.

0 to 100 %

–

Air

84

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

Parameter

Mol% Ar

Prerequisite–

Description

Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 20 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–Ar = Argon
Mol% C2H4–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
C2H4 = ethylene

Mol% C2H6–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
C2H6 = ethane

Mol% C3H8–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
C3H8 = propane

Mol% CH4–

Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
CH4 = methane

Mol% Cl2–

Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
Cl2 = chlorine

Mol% CO–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
CO = carbon monoxide

Mol% CO2–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
CO2 = carbon dioxide

Mol% H2–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
H2 = hydrogen

Mol% H2O–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
H2O = water

Mol% H2S–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
H2S = hydrogen sulfide

Mol% HCl–

Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
HCl = hydrogen chloride

Mol% He–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
He = helium

Mol% Kr–

Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
Kr = krypton

Mol% N2–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
N2 = nitrogen

Mol% n-C4H10–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
n-C4H10 = n-butane

Endress+Hauser

85Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter

Mol% Ne

Prerequisite

Description–

Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–0 to 100 %–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.

0 to 100 %–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.

0 to 100 %

–

-

-

Ne = neon
Mol% NH3–

Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
NH3 = ammonia

Mol% O2–Enter amount of substance forthe gas mixture.
O2 = oxygen

Mol% O3

As a mixture, only possible
with O2:• O3: 0 to 35 %• O2: 65 to 100 %O3 as single gas:
100 %Mol% Xe–

Xe = xenon
Special gas name*Special gas option application
package is available.

Shows the description of thegas ordered by the customer,
e.g. gas name or gas
composition.

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

9.4.3

Configuring reference conditions

Reference properties can be configured in the Reference conditions submenu.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Reference conditions‣ Reference conditions

86

Reference conditions→  87

Reference pressure→  87

Reference temperature→  87

FAD conditions→  87

FAD pressure→  87

FAD temperature→  87

Reference combustion temperature→  87

Reference combustion temperature→  87

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User entry

Reference conditions–

Select reference conditions forcalculation of the corrected volume
flow.

• 1013.25 mbara, 0 °C
• 1013.25 mbara, 15 °C• 1013.25 mbara, 20 °C• 1013.25 mbara, 25 °C• 1000 mbara, 0 °C
• 1000 mbara, 15 °C• 1000 mbara, 20 °C• 1000 mbara, 25 °C• 14.696 psia, 59 °F• 14.696 psia, 60 °F• User-defined

Reference pressure

The Others option is selected in the
Reference conditions parameter.

Select reference conditions for thecorrected volume flow.

0 to 250 bar a

Reference temperature–Enter reference temperature forcalculating the reference density.

–200 to 450 °C

FAD conditions

The Air or compressed air option is
selected in the Measurement
application parameter parameter.

Select reference conditions for the
calculation of the FAD density (FAD =free air delivery).

• 1000 mbara, 20 °C• 14.504 psia, 68 °F• User-defined

FAD pressure• The Air or compressed air option is
selected in the Measurement
application parameter parameter.
• The User-defined option is selectedin the FAD conditions parameterparameter.

Enter reference pressure for thecalulation of the FAD density (FAD =free air delivery).

0 to 250 bar a

FAD temperature• The Air or compressed air option is
selected in the Measurement
application parameter parameter.
• The User-defined option is selectedin the FAD conditions parameterparameter.

Enter reference temperature for thecalulation of the FAD density (FAD =free air delivery).

–200 to 450 °C

Reference combustion temperature

The Energy option is selected in the
Measurement application parameterparameter.

Enter reference combustion
temperature to calculate the natural
gas energy value.

–200 to 450 °C

Reference combustion temperature–

Select ref. temp. (reference combustion
temperature) for calculating the gas
energy value.

• 0 °C• 15 °C• 20 °C• 25 °C• 60 °F• User-defined

9.4.4

Sensor adjustment

Parameters pertaining to the pipe shape of the insertion version can be configured in the
Sensor adjustment submenu.
The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operating Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device ("Supplementary documentation" ).

‣ Sensor adjustment

Endress+Hauser

Installation direction→  88Installation factor→  8887

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Pipe shape→  88

Pipe inner diameter→  88Duct height→  88Duct width→  88Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User entry

Installation direction–

Set sign of flow direction to match thedirection of the arrow on the sensor.

• Flow in arrow direction• Flow against arrow
direction

Installation factor–

Enter factor to compensate themounting-related measurement error.

0.01 to 100.0

Pipe shape

Only available with t-mass I.

Select the shape of the pipe.

• Circular• Rectangular

Pipe inner diameter

Only available with t-mass I.

Enter the internal diameter of a circular 0.050 to 5 mpipe.

Duct height

Only available with t-mass I.

Enter inner duct height. Duct heightand sensor shaft are parallel.

0.050 to 5 m

Duct width

Only available with t-mass I.

Enter inner duct width. The duct widthis vertical to the sensor shaft.

0.050 to 5 m

9.4.5

Setting the system units

In the System units submenu the units of all the measured values can be set.
The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operating Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device ("Supplementary documentation" ).
Navigation"Setup" menu → System units‣ System units

88

Mass flow unit

→  89Mass unit→  89Corrected volume flow unit

→  89Corrected volume unit

→  89Volume flow unit

→  89Volume unit

→  89Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

FAD volume flow unit

→  89FAD volume unit

→  89Energy flow unit

→  89Energy unit

→  90Calorific value unit

→  90Density unit

→  90Temperature unit

→  90Pressure unit

→  90Velocity unit

→  90Length unit

→  90Date/time format→  90Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection

Factory setting

Mass flow unit

Select mass flow unit.

Unit choose list

Depends on country:• kg/h• lb/hMass unit

Select mass unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• kg
• lb

Corrected volume flow unit

Select corrected volume flow unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• Nm³/h• Sft³/hCorrected volume unit

Select corrected volume unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• Nm³• Sft³

Volume flow unit

Select volume flow unit.

Unit choose list

Depends on country:• l/h• ft³/hVolume unit

Select volume unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• ft³
• m³

FAD volume flow unit

Select FAD volumen flow unit (FAD = free
air delivery).

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• m³ FAD/h• cf FAD/min

FAD volume unit

Select FAD volumen unit (FAD = free airdelivery).

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• m³ FAD• cf FAD

Energy flow unit

Select energy flow unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kW• Btu/hEndress+Hauser

89Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter

Description

Selection

Factory setting

Energy unit

Select energy unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• kWh
• Btu

Calorific value unit

Select calorific value unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kWh/Nm³• Btu/Sft³

Density unit

Select density unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kg/m³• lb/ft³

Temperature unit

Select temperature unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• °C
• °F

Pressure unit

Select process pressure unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• bar a• psi aVelocity unit

Select velocity unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• m/s• ft/sLength unit

Select length unit for nominal diameter.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• mm
• in

Date/time format

Select date and time format.

• dd.mm.yy hh:mm• dd.mm.yy hh:mm am/pm• mm/dd/yy hh:mm• mm/dd/yy hh:mm am/pm

–

9.4.6

Displaying the I/O configuration

The I/O configuration submenu guides the user systematically through all the parametersin which the configuration of the I/O modules is displayed.
Navigation"Setup" menu → I/O configuration‣ I/O configuration

90

I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers→  91

I/O module 1 to n information→  91

I/O module 1 to n type→  91

Apply I/O configuration→  91

I/O alteration code→  91

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection / User entry

I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers Shows the terminal numbers used by the I/O module.

• Not used
• 26-27 (I/O 1)• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)• 20-21 (I/O 4) *I/O module 1 to n information

Shows information of the plugged I/O module.

• Not plugged• Invalid• Not configurable• Configurable• HART

I/O module 1 to n typeShows the I/O module type.

• Off• Current output *• Current input *• Status input *• Pulse/frequency/switch output *• Relay output *Apply I/O configuration

Apply parameterization of the freely configurable I/O module.

• No
• Yes

I/O alteration code

Enter the code in order to change the I/O configuration.

Positive integer*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

9.4.7

Configuring the current input

The "Current input" wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the current input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Current input‣ Current input 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Current span

→  92

Terminal number→  92Signal mode

→  92

Terminal number→  920/4 mA value→  9220 mA value→  92

Failure mode

→  92

Terminal number→  92

Failure value→  92

Terminal number→  9291

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Current span–

Select current range forprocess value output andupper/lower level for alarm
signal.

• 4...20 mA (4...
Country-specific:
20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA NAMUR(3.8...20.5 mA)(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA US(3.9...20.8 mA)(3.9...20.8 mA)• 0...20 mA (0...
20.5 mA)

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the current input
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)• 20-21 (I/O 4) *–Signal mode

The measuring device is not
approved for use in thehazardous area with type ofprotection Ex-i.

Select the signal mode for thecurrent input.

• Passive• Active *Active0/4 mA value–Enter 4 mA value.

Signed floating-point
number

–

20 mA value–Enter 20 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Failure mode–

Define input behavior in alarm
condition.

• Alarm• Last valid value• Defined value–

Failure value

In the Failure modeparameter, the Defined value
option is selected.

Enter value to be used by thedevice if input value fromexternal device is missing.

Signed floating-point
number–*Visibility depends on order options or device settings

9.4.8

Configuring the status input

The Status input submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the status input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Status input 1 to n

‣ Status input 1 to n

92

Assign status input→  93

Terminal number→  93

Active level→  93

Terminal number→  93

Response time status input→  93

Terminal number→  93Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection / User interface / User entry

Assign status input

Select function for the status input.

• Off• Reset totalizer 1• Reset totalizer 2• Reset totalizer 3• Reset all totalizers• Flow override• Gas group *• Zero point adjustment

Terminal number

Shows the terminal numbers used by the status input module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)• 20-21 (I/O 4) *Active level

Define input signal level at which the assigned function istriggered.

• High• Low

Response time status input

Define the minimum amount of time the input signal level must
be present before the selected function is triggered.

5 to 200 ms*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

9.4.9

Configuring the current output

The Current output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that haveto be set for configuring the current output.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Current output‣ Current output 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Assign current output 1 to n

→  94

Terminal number→  94Current span

→  94

Terminal number→  94Signal mode

→  94

Terminal number→  940/4 mA value→  9420 mA value→  95

Fixed current→  95

Terminal number→  94

Damping output 1 to n

→  9593

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Failure mode

→  95

Terminal number→  94

Failure current→  95

Terminal number→  94

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Assign current output 1 to n–

Select process variable forcurrent output.

• Off *• Temperature• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• FAD volume flow *• Volume flow
• Energy flow *• Heat flow *• Density• Flow velocity• Pressure• 2nd temperaturedelta heat *• Electronic
temperature–

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the current output
module.

• Not used
• 26-27 (I/O 1)• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)• 20-21 (I/O 4) *–Current span–

Select current range forprocess value output andupper/lower level for alarm
signal.

• 4...20 mA NAMUR Depends on country:(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US(3.8...20.5 mA)(3.9...20.8 mA)• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA (4...
(3.9...20.8 mA)
20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0...
20.5 mA)• Fixed current

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for thecurrent output.

• Active *• Passive *Active0/4 mA value

One of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  94):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Enter 4 mA value.

Signed floating-point
number–94

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

20 mA value

One of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  94):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Enter 20 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Fixed current

The Fixed current option is
selected in the Current spanparameter (→  94).

Defines the fixed output
current.

0 to 22.5 mA

22.5 mA

Damping output 1 to n

A process variable is selectedin the Assign current output
parameter (→  94) and oneof the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  94):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Set reaction time for output
signal to fluctuations in themeasured value.

0.0 to 999.9 s–

Failure mode

A process variable is selectedin the Assign current output
parameter (→  94) and oneof the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  94):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Min.
• Max.
• Last valid value• Actual value• Defined value–

Failure current

The Defined value option is
selected in the Failure modeparameter.

Enter current output value inalarm condition.

0 to 22.5 mA

22.5 mA*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

95

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

9.4.10Configuring the pulse/frequency/switch output

The Pulse/frequency/switch output wizard guides you systematically through all theparameters that can be set for configuring the selected output type.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n→  96

Operating mode

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Operating mode

Description
Define the output as a pulse, frequency or switch output.

Selection• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Configuring the pulse output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n96

Operating mode

→  97

Terminal number→  97Signal mode

→  97

Assign pulse output→  97

Pulse scaling→  97

Pulse width→  97

Failure mode

→  97

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch–

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)• 20-21 (I/O 4) *–Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active *• Passive NAMUR–

Assign pulse output 1 to n

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter.

Select process variable forpulse output.

• Off• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• FAD volume flow *• Volume flow
• Energy flow *• Heat flow *–Pulse scaling

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  96) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  97).

Enter quantity for measured
value at which a pulse is
output.

Positive floating
point number

Depends on country
and nominal
diameter

Pulse width

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  96) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  97).

Define time width of theoutput pulse.

0.05 to 2 000 ms–

Failure mode

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  96) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  97).

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual value• No pulses–*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Configuring the frequency output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nEndress+Hauser

Operating mode

→  98Terminal number→  98Signal mode

→  9897

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Assign frequency output→  98Minimum frequency value→  98Maximum frequency value→  99Measuring value at minimum
frequency→  99Measuring value at maximum
frequency→  99Failure mode

→  99Failure frequency→  99Invert output signal→  99Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch–

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)• 20-21 (I/O 4) *–Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active *• Passive NAMUR–

Assign frequency output

In the Operating modeparameter (→  96), theFrequency option is selected.

Select process variable forfrequency output.

• Off• Temperature• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• FAD volume flow *• Volume flow
• Energy flow *• Heat flow *• Density• Flow velocity• Pressure• 2nd temperaturedelta heat *• Electronic
temperature–

Minimum frequency value

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  96)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  98).

Enter minimum frequency.

0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz–

98

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Maximum frequency value

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  96)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  98).

Enter maximum frequency.

0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz–

Measuring value at minimum
frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  96)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  98).

Enter measured value forminmum frequency.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Measuring value at maximum
frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  96)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  98).

Enter measured value for
maximum frequency.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Failure mode

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  96)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  98).

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual value• Defined value• 0 Hz–Failure frequency

In the Operating modeparameter (→  96), theFrequency option is selected,
in the Assign frequency
output parameter (→  98) a
process variable is selected,
and in the Failure modeparameter, the Defined value
option is selected.

Enter frequency output value
in alarm condition.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz–

Invert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

–

*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

99Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Configuring the switch output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nOperating mode→  100

Terminal number→  100

Signal mode→  100

Switch output function→  101

Assign diagnostic behavior→  101

Assign limit→  101

Assign status→  101

Switch-on value→  101

Switch-off value→  101

Switch-on delay→  101

Switch-off delay→  102

Failure mode→  102

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch–

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)• 20-21 (I/O 4) *–Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active *• Passive NAMUR–

100

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Switch output function

The Switch option is selectedin the Operating modeparameter.

Select function for switch
output.

• Off• On• Diagnostic
behavior• Limit• Flow direction
check *
• Status–

Assign diagnostic behavior• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theDiagnostic behavior option
is selected.

Select diagnostic behavior forswitch output.

• Alarm• Alarm or warning• Warning–

Assign limit• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Select process variable for limit • Temperaturefunction.
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• FAD volume flow *• Volume flow
• Energy flow *• Heat flow *• Density• Flow velocity• 2nd temperaturedelta heat *• Electronic
temperature• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3–

Assign status• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Status option is
selected in the Switch
output function parameter.

Select device status for switch
output.

• Off• Low flow cut off–

Switch-on value• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Enter measured value for theswitch-on point.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Switch-off value• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Enter measured value for theswitch-off point.

Signed floating-point
number

–Switch-on delay• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Define delay for the switch-onof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s–

Endress+Hauser

101Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Switch-off delay• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Define delay for the switch-offof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s–

Failure mode–

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual status• Open• Closed–*

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

9.4.11

Configuring the relay output

The Relay output wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the relay output.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Relay output 1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n

102

Terminal number→  103

Relay output function→  103

Assign limit→  103

Assign diagnostic behavior→  103

Assign status→  103

Switch-off value→  103

Switch-off delay→  103

Switch-on value→  103

Switch-on delay→  103

Failure mode→  103

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the relay output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)• 20-21 (I/O 4)–

Relay output function–

Select the function for therelay output.

• Closed• Open• Diagnostic
behavior• Limit• Flow direction
check• Digital Output–

Assign limit

The Limit option is selected in
the Relay output function
parameter.

Select process variable for limit • Temperaturefunction.
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• FAD volume flow *• Volume flow
• Energy flow *• Heat flow *• Density• Flow velocity• 2nd temperaturedelta heat *• Electronic
temperature• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3–

Assign diagnostic behavior

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Diagnostic
behavior option is selected.

Select diagnostic behavior forswitch output.

• Alarm• Alarm or warning• Warning–

Assign status

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Digital Output
option is selected.

Select device status for switch
output.

• Off• Low flow cut off–

Switch-off value

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-off point.

Signed floating-point
number

–Switch-off delay

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Define delay for the switch-offof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s–

Switch-on value

The Limit option is selected in
the Relay output function
parameter.

Enter measured value for theswitch-on point.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Switch-on delay

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Define delay for the switch-onof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s–

Failure mode–

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual status• Open• Closed–*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

9.4.12

Configuring the local display

The Display wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that canconfigured for configuring the local display.
Endress+Hauser

103Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Navigation"Setup" menu → Display‣ Display
Format display→  104

Value 1 display→  104

0% bargraph value 1→  105

100% bargraph value 1→  105

Value 2 display→  105

Value 3 display→  105

0% bargraph value 3→  105

100% bargraph value 3→  105

Value 4 display→  105

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Format display

A local display is provided.

Select how measured values
are shown on the display.

• 1 value, max. size
• 1 bargraph + 1value• 2 values• 1 value large + 2
values• 4 values–

Value 1 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• Temperature• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• FAD volume flow *• Volume flow
• Energy flow *• Heat flow *• Density• Flow velocity• Pressure• 2nd temperaturedelta heat *• Electronic
temperature• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *–104

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

0% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
number

–100% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Value 2 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  104)–

Value 3 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  104)–

0% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
number

–100% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
number–Value 4 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  104)–

Value 5 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  104)–

Value 6 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  104)–

Value 7 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  104)–

Value 8 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  104)–*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

105

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

9.4.13

Configuring the low flow cut off

The Low flow cut off wizard systematically guides the user through all the parametersthat must be set to configure low flow cut off.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Low flow cut off‣ Low flow cut off
Assign process variable→  106

On value low flow cutoff→  106

Off value low flow cutoff→  106

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Select process variable for low
flow cut off.

• Off
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow• FAD volume flow *–Positive floatingpoint number

Depends on country
and nominal
diameter

Assign process variable–

On value low flow cutoff

A process variable is selectedEnter on value for low flow cut
in the Assign process variable off.
parameter (→  106).

Off value low flow cutoff

A process variable is selectedEnter off value for low flow cut 0 to 100.0 %in the Assign process variable off.
parameter (→  106).

*

106

Factory setting–

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

9.5

Advanced settings

The Advanced setup submenu with its submenus contains parameters for specificsettings.
Navigation to the "Advanced setup" submenu
The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operating Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device ("Supplementary documentation" ).
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup‣ Advanced setup

9.5.1

Enter access code→  107‣ Totalizer 1 to n

→  107‣ Display→  109‣ WLAN settings→  112‣ Configuration backup→  113‣ Administration→  115

Using the parameter to enter the access code

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Enter access code

Description
Enter access code to disable write protection of parameters.

9.5.2

User entry
Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Configuring the totalizer

In the "Totalizer 1 to n" submenu the individual totalizer can be configured.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Totalizer 1 to n

‣ Totalizer 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Assign process variable→  108

Unit totalizer 1 to n

→  108107

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Totalizer operation mode→  108

Failure mode→  108

Assign gas→  108

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description–

Unit totalizer 1 to n

A process variable is selected
Select process variable totalizer Unit choose listin the Assign process variable unit.
parameter (→  108) of the
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.

–

Totalizer operation mode

A process variable is selected
Select totalizer calculationin the Assign process variable mode.
parameter (→  108) of the
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.

• Net flow total• Forward flow total• Reverse flow total–

Failure mode

A process variable is selected
Define totalizer behavior inin the Assign process variable alarm condition.
parameter (→  108) of the
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.

• Stop• Actual value• Last valid value

–

*

108

• Off
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• FAD volume flow *• Volume flow
• Energy flow *• Heat flow *Factory setting

Assign process variable

Assign gas (Only with order code for –"Application package", option EV"Second gas group")

Select process variable fortotalizer.

Selection

Select the gas that the totalizer • Both gasesuses. This gas is only totalized • Gas
when it is currently active• Second gas(‘Active gas’ parameter).

–• Both gases option(only with ordercode for"Application
package", option
EV "Second gas
group")• Gas

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

9.5.3

Carrying out additional display configurations

In the Display submenu you can set all the parameters associated with the configurationof the local display.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Display‣ Display

Endress+Hauser

Format display→  110

Value 1 display→  1100% bargraph value 1→  110

100% bargraph value 1→  110

Decimal places 1→  110

Value 2 display→  110

Decimal places 2→  110

Value 3 display→  1100% bargraph value 3→  110

100% bargraph value 3→  110

Decimal places 3→  111

Value 4 display→  111

Decimal places 4→  111

Display language→  111

Display interval→  111

Display damping→  111

Header→  111

Header text

→  111

Separator→  111

Backlight→  111109

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Format display

A local display is provided.

Select how measured values
are shown on the display.

• 1 value, max. size
• 1 bargraph + 1value• 2 values• 1 value large + 2
values• 4 values–

Value 1 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• Temperature• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• FAD volume flow *• Volume flow
• Energy flow *• Heat flow *• Density• Flow velocity• Pressure• 2nd temperaturedelta heat *• Electronic
temperature• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *–0% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
number

–100% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Decimal places 1

A measured value is specified
in the Value 1 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx–

Value 2 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  104)–

Decimal places 2

A measured value is specified
in the Value 2 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx–

Value 3 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  104)–

0% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
number

–100% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
number–110

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Decimal places 3

A measured value is specified
in the Value 3 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx–

Value 4 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  104)–

Decimal places 4

A measured value is specified
in the Value 4 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx–

Display language

A local display is provided.

Set display language.

• English• Deutsch• Français• Español• Italiano• Nederlands• Portuguesa• Polski• русский язык(Russian)• Svenska• Türkçe• 中文 (Chinese)• 日本語 (Japanese)• 한국어 (Korean)• tiếng Việt(Vietnamese)• čeština (Czech)

English(alternatively, theordered language ispreset in the device)

Display interval

A local display is provided.

Set time measured values areshown on display if display
alternates between values.

1 to 10 s–

Display damping

A local display is provided.

Set display reaction time tofluctuations in the measured
value.

0.0 to 999.9 s–

Header

A local display is provided.

Select header contents on local • Device tag
display.
• Free text–

Header text

The Free text option is
selected in the Header
parameter.

Enter display header text.

Max. 12 characters,such as letters,
numbers or special
characters (e.g. @,
%, /)

–

Separator

A local display is provided.

Select decimal separator for
displaying numerical values.

• . (point)• , (comma). (point)

Backlight

One of the following
conditions is met:
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option F "4-line,
illum.; touch control"• Order code for "Display;
operation", option G "4-line,
illum.; touch control+WLAN"

Switch the local display
backlight on and off.

• Disable• Enable–*

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

111Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

9.5.4

WLAN configuration

The WLAN Settings submenu guides the user systematically through all the parametersthat have to be set for the WLAN configuration.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → WLAN settings‣ WLAN settings
WLAN→  112WLAN mode→  112SSID name→  112

Network security→  113

Security identification→  113User name→  113WLAN password→  113WLAN IP address→  113WLAN MAC address→  113WLAN passphrase→  113

Assign SSID name→  113

SSID name→  113

Connection state→  113

Received signal strength→  113

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

WLAN

–

Switch WLAN on and off.

• Disable• Enable–

WLAN mode–

Select WLAN mode.

• WLAN accesspoint• WLAN Client–

SSID name

The client is activated.

Enter the user-defined SSID
name (max. 32 characters).

–

–

112

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Network security–

Select the security type of the
WLAN network.

• Unsecured• WPA2-PSK• EAP-PEAP withMSCHAPv2 *• EAP-PEAP
MSCHAPv2 noserver authentic. *• EAP-TLS *–Security identification–

Select security settings anddownload these settings via
menu Data management >Security > WLAN.

• Trusted issuer
certificate• Device certificate• Device private key–

User name–Enter user name.

––

WLAN password–

Enter WLAN password.

––

WLAN IP address–Enter IP address of the WLAN
interface of the device.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (inthe particular octet)–

WLAN MAC address–Enter MAC address of the
WLAN interface of the device.

Unique 12-digit
character string
comprising lettersand numbers

Each measuring
device is given an
individual address.

WLAN passphrase

The WPA2-PSK option is
selected in the Security typeparameter.

Enter the network key (8 to 32 8 to 32-digit
characters).
character string
comprising numbers,
The network key
supplied with the device letters and special
characters (without
should be changed
spaces)during commissioningSerial number of themeasuring device(e.g. L100A802000)

for security reasons.
Assign SSID name–

Select which name will be used • Device tag
for SSID: device tag or user• User-defined
defined name.

–

SSID name• The User-defined option is
selected in the Assign SSID
name parameter.
• The WLAN access point
option is selected in the
WLAN mode parameter.

Enter the user-defined SSID
name (max. 32 characters).

–

Connection state–

Displays the connection status. • Connected• Not connected–

Received signal strength–

Shows the received signal
strength.

–*Max. 32-digit
character string
comprising numbers,
The user-defined SSID
letters and specialname may only be
assigned once. If the SSID charactersname is assigned morethan once, the devices
can interfere with one
another.

• Low• Medium• HighVisibility depends on order options or device settings

9.5.5

Configuration management

After commissioning, you can save the current device configurationor restore the previous
device configuration. The device configuration is managed via the Configuration
management parameter.

Endress+Hauser

113

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Configuration backup‣ Configuration backup
Operating time→  114

Last backup→  114

Configuration management→  114

Backup state→  114Comparison result→  114

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds(s)

Last backup

Shows when the last data backup was saved to HistoROM
backup.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds(s)Configuration management

Select action for managing the device data in the HistoROM
backup.

• Cancel• Execute backup• Restore *• Compare *• Clear backup data

Backup stateShows the current status of data saving or restoring.

• None• Backup in progress• Restoring in progress• Delete in progress• Compare in progress• Restoring failed• Backup failed

Comparison result

Comparison of current device data with HistoROM backup.

• Settings identical• Settings not identical• No backup available• Backup settings corrupt• Check not done
• Dataset incompatible*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Function scope of the "Configuration management" parameter

114

Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Execute backup

A backup copy of the current device configuration is saved from the HistoROM
backup to the memory of the device. The backup copy includes the transmitter dataof the device.

RestoreThe last backup copy of the device configuration is restored from the device
memory to the device's HistoROM backup. The backup copy includes thetransmitter data of the device.

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

Options

Description

CompareThe device configuration saved in the device memory is compared with the current
device configuration of the HistoROM backup.

Clear backup data

The backup copy of the device configuration is deleted from the memory of thedevice.

HistoROM backup
A HistoROM is a "non-volatile" device memory in the form of an EEPROM.
While this action is in progress, the configuration cannot be edited via the local
display and a message on the processing status appears on the display.

9.5.6

Using parameters for device administration

The Administration submenu systematically guides the user through all the parametersthat can be used for device administration purposes.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration‣ Administration‣ Define access code→  115‣ Reset access code→  116

Device reset→  116

Using the parameter to define the access code
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Define access code

‣ Define access code
Define access code→  115

Confirm access code→  115

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User entry

Define access code

Restrict write-access to parameters to protect the configurationof the device against unintentional changes.

Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Confirm access code

Confirm the entered access code.

Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Endress+Hauser

115

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Using the parameter to reset the access code
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Reset access code

‣ Reset access code
Operating time→  116

Reset access code→  116

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / User entry

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds(s)

Reset access code

Reset access code to factory settings.

Character string comprising numbers, lettersand special characters

For a reset code, contact your Endress+Hauser service
organization.

The reset code can only be entered via:
• Web browser• DeviceCare, FieldCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface)• Fieldbus

Using the parameter to reset the device
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Device reset*

Description
Reset the device configuration - either entirely or in part - to adefined state.

Selection• Cancel• To delivery settings• Restart device• Restore S-DAT backup *Visibility depends on order options or device settings

9.5.7

In-situ adjustment

In-situ adjustment is used to adjust the flow output by the measuring device to the real
flow of the facility. Flow profiles can be distorted by facility parts such as pipe elbows,
extensions, reductions or valves. A distorted flow profile can, in turn, negatively impact theaccuracy of the measuring device. By taking into consideration the actual process-specificconditions at the facility, including any effects from installation, in-situ adjustment
provides flow display that is adapted to the local conditions.

116

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

In-situ adjustment can lead to better measurement results in the following cases:• Process-specific facility conditions / installation effects• If the flow profile is distorted• For unfavorable inlet and outlet conditions• If the gas is unknown• If it is not possible to use a flow conditioner to rectify the distorted flow profile• If process conditions deviate significantly from reference conditions (pressure andtemperature conditions of factory calibration)• Third-party adjustments with the process gas actually used
In-situ adjustment has the following specific features:• Can be used for both unidirectional and bidirectional sensors• Can be defined for up to 16 flow points (for the entire operating range)• At least one flow point is required for the adjustment but the general principle is thatthe more flow points that are defined, the better the measuring performance• Measuring device can be configured without interrupting the process• The measuring device takes account of the choice of process gas and the actual process
conditions during the measurement• The flow value can be entered manually via a display or an operating interface, or a flow
value from a reference device can be read into the measuring device via a current input
or bus communication
Prerequisites for optimum in-situ adjustment• The accuracy of the flow reference used determines the performance of the measuring
device adjusted in-situ. For this reason, the use of a reference device with a traceablecalibration is recommended• Calibration points all at the same temperature and pressure conditions• Compositions of gases or gas mixtures are made available to the measuring device asthese compositions are used for pressure and temperature compensation• Precise pressure specifications are important if a volume flowmeter is used as thereference device• If the flow values are indicated in corrected volume flow, it is important that thestandard reference conditions in the reference device and in the device are identical• For optimum results, it is advisable to use a reference device with traceablecalibration for the adjustment.
• If a reference device is not available, a fan characteristic curve, for example, can act as the
Performing in-situ adjustment

Endress+Hauser

1.

Select the gas: Expert → Sensor → Measurement mode → Gas → Gas
 This entry is important for measuring device pressure and temperaturecompensation.

2.

Activate in-situ adjustment: Expert → Sensor → In-situ adjustment → Activate in-situ
adjustment

3.

Confirm selection: Yes If an in-situ adjustment already exists, these adjustment points are loaded. An
existing adjustment (an entire series of flow points) can be deleted from themeasuring device using the "Clear values" function.

4.

Select the reference value: Expert → Sensor → In-situ adjustment → Select flow
reference If volume flow is selected, it is important that the process pressure entered in themeasuring device is as accurate as possible. In the case of corrected volume flowor FAD volume flow, the defined reference operating conditions must match
those of the reference measuring device.

117

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

5.

Select the entry method for the reference value: Expert → Sensor → In-situ
adjustment → Input type reference value
 If "Manual" is selected, the operator must enter the flow value manually via thedisplay (or other operating interface). However, if "Current input" or "External
value" (via bus communication) is selected, the current flow values are displayed
as read only reference values. The available entry modes depend on the I/O
modules available.

The user can first approach the flow points with the facility. As soon as a desired flow
value is reached, the value can either be saved by confirming the value or be entered as afixed value by hand.
The entry method depends on the selected entry mode.
The measured flow value is checked to determine its validity on the basis of the following
criteria:• Average absolute deviation of the flow value• Standard deviation of the flow value
If a criterion is not met, the value is rejected and the message "Invalid" is displayed. If bothcriterion are met, the message "Passed" is displayed. If the flow value fluctuates too much,"Unstable" is displayed. If an existing adjustment is "readjusted", and with a maximum of 16
defined flow values, the flow value that is closest to the new adjusted value is replaced.
Here, "Replaced" is displayed as the status.
The user can also add a description to the adjustment. Three different text fields, with
16 alphanumeric characters per field, are available for this purpose. It is advisable touse the text fields to identify the adjustment using the name of the gas/gas mixture
and the process conditions of the adjustment. If the in-situ adjustment is adjusted bya calibration laboratory with the gas that is actually used by the operator, it isadvisable to also include the name of the laboratory, the date of the adjustment andthe name of the operator in the description.
Special cases
Individual flow point
A maximum of 16 flow points can be defined. However, in certain situations it may notalways be possible to adjust multiple flow points. In such cases, the measuring device canbe adjusted with just a few operating points. The minimum number of flow points that are
required is one. If only one operating point is adjusted, the measuring device uses default
values to replace the missing adjustment values. Therefore, the operator should be awarethat the accuracy of the in-situ adjustment can suffer when just one flow point is defined if
the measured flow is not close to the adjustment value.
Bidirectional flow
Measuring devices that are equipped with the bidirectional option can be adjusted in situ
in both flow directions or in just one flow direction, as required. If the measuring device isonly adjusted in one direction, it is important that the adjustment is in the positive
direction (forward flow) as these adjustment points are automatically replicated to thenegative direction (reverse flow).
Unknown gas composition
If the gas or gas mixture is unknown, or if the gas composition cannot be defined by thestandard gas selection, the user can define the process gas as "Air". This method has the
disadvantage that compensation in the event of variations in the pressure andtemperature cannot be guaranteed. If the operator is not sure of the exact composition of
the gas but can make an approximate guess, it is recommended to use this approximate
gas composition instead of air.

118

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning"In-situ adjustment" submenu
Navigation"Expert" menu → Sensor → In-situ adjustment‣ In-situ adjustment

Endress+Hauser

Activate in-situ adjustment (17360)→  120

Input type reference value (17351)→  120

Delete values (17355)→  120

Confirm (17356)→  120

Select flow reference (17354)→  120

Stability check (17366)→  120

Actual flow value (17365)→  120

External reference value (17352)→  120

Reference value (17353)→  120

Apply value (17364)→  120

Status (17367)→  120

Description 1 (17359)→  120

Description 2 (17358)→  120

Description 3 (17357)→  120

Description 4 (17002)→  120‣ Adjustment values in use→  121119

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection / User interface /User entry

Factory setting

Activate in-situ adjustment

Activate the in-situ adjustment. The points
stored by the user are used for the in-situ
adjustment.

• No
• Yes

–

Input type reference value

Select input type for the reference value.

• Off• Manual• Current input 1 *• Current input 2 *• Current input 3 *• External value *–Delete values

Delete previous adjustment values anddescriptions.

• No
• Yes

–

Confirm

Confirm deletion.

• No
• Yes

–

Select flow reference

Select process variable. This process variable
is used as reference value for the in situ
adjustment.

• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• FAD volume flow *• Volume flow–

Stability check

Activate stability check. New adjustment
value is only accepted when themeasurement is stable.

• No
• Yes

–

Actual flow value

Shows the actual flow in relation to the
maximum, factory-measured value that is
adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–External reference value

Shows the external reference value for the in Signed floating-point number
situ adjustment.

–

Reference valueEnter fixed value as reference value used forthe in situ adjustment.

Signed floating-point number–

Apply value

Apply the actual value.

• No
• Yes

–

StatusShows the validity of the actual reference
value.

• Passed• Replaced• Unstable• Invalid–

Description 1

Description for in-situ adjustment: e.g.
facility, operator, date.

--

Description 2

Description for in-situ adjustment: e.g.
facility, operator, date.

--

Description 3

Description for in-situ adjustment: e.g.
facility, operator, date.

--

Description 4

Description for in-situ adjustment: e.g.
facility, operator, date.

-

-

*

120

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning"Adjustment values in use" submenu
Navigation"Expert" menu → Sensor → In-situ adjustment → Adjustment values in use‣ Adjustment values in use

Endress+Hauser

Gas description 1/2 (17361)→  122

Gas description 2/2 (17362)→  122

Flow value 1 (17368)→  122

Flow value 2 (17369)→  122

Flow value 3 (17370)→  122

Flow value 4 (17371)→  122

Flow value 5 (17372)→  122

Flow value 6 (17373)→  122

Flow value 7 (17374)→  122

Flow value 8 (17375)→  122

Flow value 9 (17376)→  122

Flow value 10 (17377)→  122

Flow value 11 (17378)→  122

Flow value 12 (17379)→  122

Flow value 13 (17380)→  122

Flow value 14 (17381)→  122

Flow value 15 (17382)→  122

Flow value 16 (17383)→  122121

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Factory setting

Gas description 1/2

Shows the 1st part of the description of theset gas used in the in-situ adjustment.

--

Gas description 2/2

Shows the 2nd part of the description of theset gas used in the in-situ adjustment.

--

Flow value 1

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 2

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 3

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 4

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 5

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 6

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 7

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 8

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 9

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 10

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 11

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 12

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 13

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 14

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 15

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–Flow value 16

Shows the stored flow value in relation to
the maximum, factory-measured value thatis adapted to the actual process conditions.

–2 000 to 2 000 %–122

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

9.6

Configuration management

After commissioning, you can save the current device configurationor restore the previous
device configuration. The device configuration is managed via the Configuration
management parameter.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Configuration backup‣ Configuration backup
Operating time→  114

Last backup→  114

Configuration management→  114

Backup state→  114Comparison result→  114

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds(s)

Last backup

Shows when the last data backup was saved to HistoROM
backup.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds(s)Configuration management

Select action for managing the device data in the HistoROM
backup.

• Cancel• Execute backup• Restore• Compare• Clear backup data

Backup stateShows the current status of data saving or restoring.

• None• Backup in progress• Restoring in progress• Delete in progress• Compare in progress• Restoring failed• Backup failed

Comparison result

Comparison of current device data with HistoROM backup.

• Settings identical• Settings not identical• No backup available• Backup settings corrupt• Check not done
• Dataset incompatible

9.6.1

Endress+Hauser

Function scope of the "Configuration management" parameter

Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Execute backup

A backup copy of the current device configuration is saved from the HistoROM
backup to the memory of the device. The backup copy includes the transmitter dataof the device.

123

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Options

Description

RestoreThe last backup copy of the device configuration is restored from the device
memory to the device's HistoROM backup. The backup copy includes thetransmitter data of the device.

CompareThe device configuration saved in the device memory is compared with the current
device configuration of the HistoROM backup.

Clear backup data

The backup copy of the device configuration is deleted from the memory of thedevice.

HistoROM backup
A HistoROM is a "non-volatile" device memory in the form of an EEPROM.
While this action is in progress, the configuration cannot be edited via the local
display and a message on the processing status appears on the display.

9.7

Simulation

Via the Simulation submenu, it is possible to simulate various process variables in theprocess and the device alarm mode and verify downstream signal chains (switching valvesor closed-control loops). The simulation can be performed without a real measurement (noflow of medium through the device).
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Simulation‣ Simulation

124

Assign simulation process variable→  125

Process variable value→  125

Current input 1 to n simulation→  126

Value current input 1 to n

→  126

Status input simulation 1 to n

→  126

Input signal level 1 to n

→  126

Current output 1 to n simulation→  125

Value current output 1 to n

→  125

Frequency output simulation 1 to n

→  125

Frequency value 1 to n

→  125

Pulse output simulation 1 to n

→  125

Pulse value 1 to n

→  125

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

Switch output simulation 1 to n

→  125

Switch status 1 to n

→  125

Relay output 1 to n simulation→  125

Switch status 1 to n

→  126

Device alarm simulation→  126

Diagnostic event category→  126

Diagnostic event simulation→  126

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User entry

Assign simulation process variable–

Select a process variable for thesimulation process that is activated.

• Off• Temperature• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• FAD volume flow *• Volume flow
• Energy flow *• Heat flow *• Density• Flow velocity

Process variable value

A process variable is selected in the
Assign simulation process variable
parameter (→  125).

Enter the simulation value for theselected process variable.

Depends on the process
variable selected

Current output 1 to n simulation–

Switch the simulation of the current
output on and off.

• Off
• On

Value current output 1 to n

In the Current output 1 to n
Enter the current value for simulation.
simulation parameter, the On option is
selected.

3.59 to 22.5 mA

Frequency output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating mode parameter, theFrequency option is selected.

Switch the simulation of the frequency
output on and off.

• Off
• On

Frequency value 1 to n

In the Frequency output simulation
1 to n parameter, the On option is
selected.

Enter the frequency value for thesimulation.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

Pulse output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating mode parameter, thePulse option is selected.

Set and switch off the pulse output
simulation.

• Off• Fixed value• Down-counting value

Fixed value option: Pulse
 For
width parameter (→  97)
defines the pulse width of thepulses output.
Pulse value 1 to n

In the Pulse output simulation 1 to n
parameter, the Down-counting value
option is selected.

Enter the number of pulses for
simulation.

0 to 65 535

Switch output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating mode parameter, theSwitch option is selected.

Switch the simulation of the switch
output on and off.

• Off
• On

Switch status 1 to n–

Select the status of the status output for • Openthe simulation.
• Closed

Relay output 1 to n simulation–

Switch simulation of the relay output
on and off.

Endress+Hauser

• Off
• On

125

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Switch status 1 to n

The On option is selected in the Switch
output simulation 1 to n parameterparameter.

Select status of the relay output for thesimulation.

• Open• Closed

Device alarm simulation–

Switch the device alarm on and off.

• Off
• On

Diagnostic event category–

Select a diagnostic event category.

• Sensor• Electronics• Configuration• ProcessDiagnostic event simulation–

Select a diagnostic event to simulate
this event.

• Off• Diagnostic event picklist(depends on the category
selected)

Current input 1 to n simulation–

Switch simulation of the current input
on and off.

• Off
• On

Value current input 1 to n

In the Current input 1 to n simulation
parameter, the On option is selected.

Enter the current value for simulation.

0 to 22.5 mA

Status input simulation 1 to n–

Switch simulation of the status input on • Off
and off.
• On

Input signal level 1 to n

In the Status input simulation
parameter, the On option is selected.

Select the signal level for the simulation • Highof the status input.
• Low

*

Selection / User entry

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

9.8

Protecting settings from unauthorized access

The following write protection options exist in order to protect the configuration of themeasuring device from unintentional modification:• Protect access to parameters via access code →  126• Protect access to local operation via key locking →  62
• Protect access to measuring device via write protection switch →  128

9.8.1

Write protection via access code

The effects of the user-specific access code are as follows:• Via local operation, the parameters for the measuring device configuration are writeprotected and their values can no longer be changed.
• Device access is protected via the Web browser, as are the parameters for the measuring
device configuration.
• Device access is protected via FieldCare or DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), as
are the parameters for the measuring device configuration.
Defining the access code via the local display

126

1.

Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  115).

2.

Maximum of 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special
characters as the access code.

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

3.

Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  115) toconfirm.
 The  symbol appears in front of all write-protected parameters.
• Disabling parameter write protection via access code →  61.
• If the access code is lost: Resetting the access code →  127.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged in is displayed in Accessstatus parameter.
• Navigation path: Operation → Access status• User roles and their access rights →  61

• The device automatically locks the write-protected parameters again if a key is notpressed for 10 minutes in the navigation and editing view.
• The device locks the write-protected parameters automatically after 60 s if the user skips
back to the operational display mode from the navigation and editing view.
Parameters which can always be modified via the local display
Certain parameters that do not affect the measurement are excepted from parameter write
protection via the local display. Despite the user-specific access code, they can always be
modified, even if the other parameters are locked.

Language

Parameters for configuring
the local display

Parameters for configuring
the totalizer↓↓

Format display

Control Totalizer

Contrast display

Preset value

Display interval

Reset all totalizers

Defining the access code via the web browser
1.

Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  115).

2.

Define a 16-digit (max.) numeric code as the access code.

3.

Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  115) toconfirm.
 The web browser switches to the login page.
• Disabling parameter write protection via access code →  61.
• If the access code is lost: Resetting the access code →  127.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged in is displayed in the Accessstatus parameter.
• Navigation path: Operation → Access status• User roles and their access rights →  61

If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the web browser automatically returns to thelogin page.
Resetting the access code
If you misplace the user-specific access code, it is possible to reset the code to the factory
setting. A reset code must be entered for this purpose. The user-specific access code canthen be defined again afterwards.

Endress+Hauser

127

Commissioning

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Via Web browser, FieldCare, DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), fieldbus
You can only obtain a reset code from your local Endress+Hauser service organization.
The code must be calculated explicitly for every device.
1.

Note down the serial number of the device.

2.

Read off the Operating time parameter.

3.

Contact the local Endress+Hauser service organization and tell them the serial
number and the operating time.
 Get the calculated reset code.

4.

Enter the reset code in the Reset access code parameter (→  116).
 The access code has been reset to the factory setting 0000. It can be redefined→  126.
For IT security reasons, the calculated reset code is only valid for 96 hours from thespecified operating time and for the specific serial number. If you cannot return to thedevice within 96 hours, you should either increase the operating time you read out by
a few days or switch off the device.

9.8.2

Write protection via write protection switch

Unlike parameter write protection via a user-specific access code, this allows the user tolock write access to the entire operating menu - apart from the "Contrast display"parameter.
The parameter values are now read only and cannot be edited any more (exception"Contrast display" parameter):• Via local display• Via HART protocol
Proline 500 – digital
Enabling/disabling write protection

r

Po
I/O
I/O
I/O

we

2

3

4
ES
C

+
Po

we

r
op
en
pres
s

ES

-

E

C

+

-

op
en
pres
s

3.

2.

I/O

2

P

er
ow

1.

2

3

4

I/O

3

I/O

3

1
Off

4.
On

A0029673

1281.

Open the housing cover.

2.

Remove the display module.

3.

Fold open the terminal cover.

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Commissioning

4.

Enable or disable write protection:
Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the ON
position enables hardware write protection/to the OFF position (factory setting)disables hardware write protection.
 In the Locking status parameter, the Hardware locked option is displayed→  130. When hardware write protection is active, the  symbol appears in
the header of the measured value display and in the navigation view in front of
the parameters.

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX

XX
A0029425

5.

Insert the display module.

6.

Close the housing cover.

7.

LWARNING
Excessive tightening torque applied to the fixing screws!
Risk of damaging the plastic transmitter.
‣ Tighten the fixing screws as per the tightening torque: 2 Nm (1.5 lbf ft)
Tighten the securing screws.

Endress+Hauser

129

Operation

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

10

Operation

10.1

Reading off the device locking status

Device active write protection: Locking status parameter
Operation → Locking status
Function scope of the "Locking status" parameter
Options

Description

None

The access authorization displayed in the Access status parameter applies→  61. Only appears on local display.

Hardware locked

The DIP switch for hardware locking is activated on the PCB board. This locks write
access to the parameters (e.g. via local display or operating tool) →  128.

SIL locked

The SIL mode is enabled. This locks write access to the parameters (e.g. via local
display or operating tool).

Temporarily locked

Write access to the parameters is temporarily locked on account of internal
processes running in the device (e.g. data upload/download, reset, etc.). Once theinternal processing has been completed, the parameters can be changed once
again.

10.2

Adjusting the operating language

Detailed information:• To configure the operating language →  80
• For information on the operating languages supported by the measuring device→  198

10.3

Configuring the display

Detailed information:• On the basic settings for the local display →  103• On the advanced settings for the local display →  109

10.4

Reading off measured values

With the Measured values submenu, it is possible to read all the measured values.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values‣ Measured values

130‣ Process variables→  131‣ System values→  132‣ Input values→  133

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation

10.4.1‣ Output values→  134‣ Totalizer→  132

Process variables

The Process variables submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for each process variable.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Process variables‣ Process variables
Mass flow→  131

Corrected volume flow

→  131

Volume flow

→  131

FAD volume flow

→  132

Energy flow

→  132

Temperature→  132

Density→  132

Flow velocity→  132

Heat flow→  132

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Mass flow

Prerequisite–

Description
Displays the mass flow that is currently
measured.

User interface
Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from: Mass flow unit
parameter (→  89)
Corrected volume flow–

Displays the corrected volume flow thatis currently calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Correctedvolume flow unit parameter(→  89).
Volume flow–

Displays the volume flow that iscurrently measured.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Volume flow
unit parameter (→  89).

Endress+Hauser

131

Operation

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter
FAD volume flow

Prerequisite

Description

User interface

The Air or compressed air option is
selected in the Measurement
application parameter.

Displays the FAD volume flow that iscurrently calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberEnergy flow

The Energy option is selected in the
Measurement application parameter.

Shows the energy flow currently
calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberTemperature–

Displays the temperature that iscurrently measured.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from: FAD volume
flow unit parameter (→  89)

Dependency
The unit is taken from: Temperatureunit parameter (→  90)
Density–Shows the density currently calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberFlow velocity–

Shows the flow velocity currently
calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberHeat flow

The Energy option is selected in the
Measurement application parameter.

Shows the heat flow currently
calculated.

Signed floating-point
number

10.4.2

System values

The System values submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every system value.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → System values‣ System values→  132

Electronic temperature

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Electronic temperature

Description
Indication of the current temperature of the electronics.

10.4.3User interface
Signed floating-point number"Totalizer" submenu

The Totalizer submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every totalizer.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Totalizer‣ Totalizer

132

Totalizer value 1 to n

→  133

Totalizer overflow 1 to n

→  133

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Totalizer value 1 to n

Displays the current totalizer counter value.

Signed floating-point number

Totalizer overflow 1 to n

Displays the current totalizer overflow.

Integer with sign

10.4.4"Input values" submenu

The Input values submenu guides you systematically to the individual input values.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values‣ Input values‣ Current input 1 to n

→  133‣ Status input 1 to n

→  133

Input values of current input
The Current input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every current input.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Current input 1 to n

‣ Current input 1 to n
Measured values 1 to n

→  133

Measured current 1 to n

→  133

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Measured values 1 to n

Displays the current input value.

Signed floating-point number

Measured current 1 to n

Displays the current value of the current input.

0 to 22.5 mA

Input values of status input
The Status input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every status input.

Endress+Hauser

133

Operation

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Status input 1 to n

‣ Status input 1 to n
→  134

Value status input

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Value status input

Description
Shows the current input signal level.

10.4.5User interface• High• Low

Output values

The Output values submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values‣ Output values‣ Current output 1 to n

→  134‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output→  135‣ Relay output 1 to n

→  135

1 to nOutput values of current output
The Value current output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every current output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Value current output 1 to n

‣ Current output 1 to n

134

Output current 1 to n

→  135

Measured current 1 to n

→  135

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Output current 1

Displays the current value currently calculated for the current
output.

3.59 to 22.5 mA

Measured current

Displays the current value currently measured for the current
output.

0 to 30 mA

Output values for pulse/frequency/switch output
The Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed
to display the current measured values for every pulse/frequency/switch output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nOutput frequency 1 to n

→  135

Pulse output 1 to n

→  135

Switch status 1 to n

→  135

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Output frequency 1 to n

In the Operating mode parameter, theFrequency option is selected.

Displays the value currently measured
for the frequency output.

Pulse output 1 to n

The Pulse option is selected in the
Displays the pulse frequency currently
Operating mode parameter parameter. output.

Positive floating-point
number

Switch status 1 to n

The Switch option is selected in the
Operating mode parameter.

• Open• Closed

Displays the current switch output
status.

User interface
0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

Output values for relay output
The Relay output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every relay output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Relay output 1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Switch status→  136

Switch cycles→  136

Max. switch cycles number→  136135

Operation

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Switch status

Shows the current relay switch status.

• Open• Closed

Switch cycles

Shows number of all performed switch cycles.

Positive integer

Max. switch cycles number

Shows the maximal number of guaranteed switch cycles.

Positive integer

10.5

Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions

The following are available for this purpose:• Basic settings using theSetup menu (→  81)• Advanced settings using theAdvanced setup submenu (→  107)

10.6

Performing a totalizer reset

The totalizers are reset in the Operation submenu:• Control Totalizer• Reset all totalizers
Navigation"Operation" menu → Totalizer handling‣ Totalizer handlingControl Totalizer 1 to n

→  136

Preset value 1 to n

→  136

Totalizer value 1 to n

→  137

Reset all totalizers→  137

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User entry /User interface

Control Totalizer 1 to n

A process variable is selected in the
Assign process variable parameter(→  108) of the Totalizer 1 to nsubmenu.

Control totalizer value.

• Totalize• Reset + hold
• Preset + hold
• Reset + totalize• Preset + totalize• HoldPreset value 1 to n

A process variable is selected in the
Assign process variable parameter(→  108) of the Totalizer 1 to nsubmenu.

Specify start value for totalizer.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
unit of the selected process
 Thevariable is defined in the Unit
totalizer parameter (→  108)for the totalizer.

136

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User entry /User interface

Totalizer value–

Displays the current totalizer countervalue.

Signed floating-point
numberReset all totalizers–

Reset all totalizers to 0 and start.

• Cancel• Reset + totalize

10.6.1

Function scope of "Control Totalizer" parameter

Options

Description

Totalize

The totalizer is started or continues running.

Reset + holdPreset + hold

The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is reset to 0.
1)

The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is set to its defined start value
from the Preset value parameter.

Reset + totalize
Preset + totalize
Hold
1)

The totalizer is reset to 0 and the totaling process is restarted.
1)

The totalizer is set to the defined start value in the Preset value parameter and thetotaling process is restarted.
Totalizing is stopped.

Visible depending on the order options or device settings

10.6.2Function range of "Reset all totalizers" parameter

Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Reset + totalize

Resets all totalizers to 0 and restarts the totaling process. This deletes all thepreviously aggregated flow values.

10.7

Displaying data logging

The Extended HistoROM application package must be enabled in the device (order
option) for the Data logging submenu to appear. This contains all the parameters for themeasured value history.
Data logging is also available via:
• Plant Asset Management Tool FieldCare →  72.
• Web browser
Function range• A total of 1000 measured values can be stored• 4 logging channels• Adjustable logging interval for data logging• Display of the measured value trend for each logging channel in the form of a chart/ ../XXXXXXXX
175.7740.69 l/h
-100s

0A0034352

Endress+Hauser

137

Operation

Proline t-mass I 500 HART• x-axis: depending on the number of channels selected displays 250 to 1000 measured
values of a process variable.
• y-axis: displays the approximate measured value span and constantly adapts this to theongoing measurement.
If the length of the logging interval or the assignment of the process variables to thechannels is changed, the content of the data logging is deleted.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Data logging‣ Data logging
Assign channel 1→  139

Assign channel 2→  139

Assign channel 3→  139

Assign channel 4→  139

Logging interval→  139

Clear logging data

→  139

Data logging→  139

Logging delay→  139

Data logging control→  139

Data logging status→  139

Entire logging duration→  139‣ Display channel 1‣ Display channel 2‣ Display channel 3‣ Display channel 4

138

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operation

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User entry /User interface

Assign channel 1

The Extended HistoROM application
package is available.

Assign process variable to logging
channel.

• Off• Temperature• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• FAD volume flow *• Volume flow
• Energy flow
• Heat flow *• Density• Flow velocity• Pressure• 2nd temperature delta
heat *• Electronic temperature• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *Assign channel 2

The Extended HistoROM application
package is available.

Assign a process variable to logging
channel.

For the picklist, see theAssign channel 1
parameter (→  139)

Assign a process variable to logging
channel.

For the picklist, see theAssign channel 1
parameter (→  139)

Assign a process variable to logging
channel.

For the picklist, see theAssign channel 1
parameter (→  139)

software options currently
 The
enabled are displayed in the
Software option overview
parameter.
Assign channel 3

The Extended HistoROM application
package is available.
software options currently
 The
enabled are displayed in the
Software option overview
parameter.

Assign channel 4

The Extended HistoROM application
package is available.
software options currently
 The
enabled are displayed in the
Software option overview
parameter.

Logging interval

The Extended HistoROM application
package is available.

Define the logging interval for data
logging. This value defines the timeinterval between the individual data
points in the memory.

0.1 to 3 600.0 s

Clear logging data

The Extended HistoROM application
package is available.

Clear the entire logging data.

• Cancel• Clear data

Data logging–

Select the type of data logging.

• Overwriting• Not overwriting

Logging delay

In the Data logging parameter, the Not Enter the time delay for measured
overwriting option is selected.
value logging.

0 to 999 h

Data logging control

In the Data logging parameter, the Not Start and stop measured value logging.
overwriting option is selected.

• None• Delete + start• Stop

Data logging status

In the Data logging parameter, the Not Displays the measured value logging
overwriting option is selected.
status.

• Done• Delay active• Active• Stopped

Entire logging duration

In the Data logging parameter, the Not Displays the total logging duration.
overwriting option is selected.

Positive floating-point
number*Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

139

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

11

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

11.1

General troubleshooting

For local display
Error

Possible causes

Remedial action

Local display is dark, but signal output is within
the valid range

The cable of the display module is not plugged in Insert the plug correctly into the maincorrectly.
electronics module and display module.

Local display dark and no output signals

Supply voltage does not match the voltage
specified on the nameplate.

Apply the correct supply voltage →  41.

Local display dark and no output signals

Supply voltage has incorrect polarity.

Reverse polarity of supply voltage.

Local display dark and no output signals

No contact between connecting cables andterminals.

Ensure electrical contact between the cable andthe terminal.

Local display dark and no output signals• Terminals are not plugged into the I/O
electronics module correctly.
• Terminals are not plugged into the mainelectronics module correctly.

Check terminals.

Local display dark and no output signals• I/O electronics module is defective.
• Main electronics module is defective.

Order spare part →  169.

Local display dark and no output signals

The connector between the main electronics
module and display module is not plugged incorrectly.

Check the connection and correct if necessary.

Local display cannot be read, but signal output is Display is set too bright or too dark.
within the valid range• Set the display brighter by simultaneously
pressing  + .
• Set the display darker by simultaneously
pressing  + .

Local display is dark, but signal output is within
the valid range

Display module is defective.

Order spare part →  169.

Backlighting of local display is red

Diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic
behavior has occurred.

Take remedial measures →  154

Text on local display appears in a language thatcannot be understood.

The selected operating language cannot be
understood.

1. Press  +  for 2 s ("home position").
2. Press .
3. Configure the required language in the
Display language parameter (→  111).

Message on local display:"Communication Error""Check Electronics"

Communication between the display module and • Check the cable and the connector between
the electronics is interrupted.
the main electronics module and display
module.
• Order spare part →  169.

For output signals
Error

Possible causes

Remedial action

Signal output outside the valid range

Main electronics module is defective.

Order spare part →  169.

Signal output outside the valid current range(< 3.6 mA or > 22 mA)

Main electronics module is defective.
I/O electronics module is defective.

Order spare part →  169.

Device shows correct value on local display, but
signal output is incorrect, though in the valid
range.

Parameter configuration error

Check and adjust parameter configuration.

Device measures incorrectly.

Configuration error or device is operated outside
the application.

1. Check and correct parameter configuration.
2. Observe limit values specified in the"Technical Data".

140

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

For access
Error

Possible causes

Remedial action

No write access to parameters.

Hardware write protection is enabled.

Set the write protection switch on the mainelectronics module to the OFF position(Verweisziel existiert nicht, aber@y.link.required='true')→  128.

No write access to parameters.

Current user role has limited accessauthorization.

1. Check user role →  61.
2. Enter correct customer-specific access code→  61.

Connection via HART protocol is not possible.

Missing or incorrectly installed communication
resistor.

Install the communication resistor (250 Ω)correctly. Observe the maximum load →  182.

Connection via HART protocol is not possible.

Commubox• Connected incorrectly.
• Configured incorrectly.
• Driver is not installed correctly.
• The USB port on the PC is incorrectly
configured.

Observe the Commubox FXA195 HART
documentation:

Web server is disabled.

Use the "FieldCare" or "DeviceCare" operating tool
to check if the web server of the device isenabled and enable if necessary →  68.

The Ethernet interface is incorrectly configuredon the PC.

‣ Check the properties of the Internet protocol

Connection to the web server is not possible.

 Technical Information TI00404F(TCP/IP) →  64.

‣ Check the network settings with the IT
manager.

Connection to the web server is not possible.

The IP address is incorrectly configured on the
PC.

Check the IP address: 192.168.1.212 →  64

Connection to the web server is not possible.

WLAN access data are incorrect.

• Check WLAN network status.
• Log on to the device again using WLAN
access data.
• Check that WLAN is enabled for the device
and operating device →  64.

WLAN communication is disabled.

–

It is not possible to connect to the web server,
FieldCare or DeviceCare.

WLAN network is not available.

• Check whether WLAN reception is available:
LED on the display module lights up in blue.
• Check if the WLAN connection is enabled:
LED on display module flashes blue.
• Switch on instrument function.

No network connection or unstable network
connection.

WLAN network is weak.

• Operating device outside of receiving range:
Check the network status on the operating
device.
• To improve network performance, use an
external WLAN antenna.

Parallel WLAN and Ethernet communication.

• Check network settings.
• Temporarily enable only the WLAN as aninterface.

Data transfer is active.

Wait until data transfer or current action isfinished.

Connection lost

‣ Check cable connection and power supply.
‣ Refresh web browser and restart if

Web browser is frozen and no further operation
possible.

necessary.

The web browser contents are difficult to read or The web browser version used is not the bestincomplete.
option.

No contents displayed in the web browser orcontents incomplete.

‣ Use correct web browser version →  63.
‣ Empty the web browser cache.
‣ Restart the web browser.

Unsuitable view settings.

Change the font size/display ratio of the webbrowser.

• JavaScript is not enabled.
• JavaScript cannot be enabled.

‣ Enable JavaScript.
‣ Enter http://XXX.XXX.X.X.XX/servlet/
basic.html as the IP address.

Endress+Hauser

141

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Error

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Possible causes

Remedial action

Operation with FieldCare or DeviceCare notpossible via CDI-RJ45 service interface (port
8000).

Firewall of the PC or network prevents
communication.

Depending on the settings of the firewall usedon the PC or in the network, the firewall must be
disabled or adjusted for FieldCare/DeviceCareaccess.

Flashing of firmware with FieldCare or
DeviceCare not possible via CDI-RJ45 service
interface (port 8000 or TFTP ports).

Firewall of the PC or network prevents
communication.

Depending on the settings of the firewall usedon the PC or in the network, the firewall must be
disabled or adjusted for FieldCare/DeviceCareaccess.

142

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

11.2

Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes

11.2.1

Transmitter

Proline 500 – digital
Different LEDs in the transmitter provide information on the device status.

r

Po
we
I/O
I/O
I/O

2

3

4
ES

C

+
Po

ES

-

E

we
r
op

C

+

en
pres
s

-

op
en
pres
s

3.

2.

I/O

3

I/O

2

P

ow

er

1.

5

I/O

3

1
2

3

4
A0029689

1
2
3
4
5

Supply voltage
Device status
Not usedCommunication
Service interface (CDI) active

1.

Open the housing cover.

2.

Remove the display module.

3.

Fold open the terminal cover.

LED
1

2

2

3

Endress+Hauser

Color

Meaning

Off

Supply voltage is off or too low.

Green

Supply voltage is OK.

Off

Firmware error

Green

Device status is OK.

Flashing green

Device is not configured.

Flashing red

A diagnostic event with "Warning" diagnostic
behavior has occurred.

Red

A diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior
has occurred.

Flashing red/green

The device restarts.

Device status (during
start-up)Flashes red slowly

If > 30 seconds: problem with the boot loader.

Flashes red quickly

If > 30 seconds: compatibility problem whenreading the firmware.

Not used––

Supply voltage

Device status (normal
operation)

143

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

LED
4

5

Communication

Service interface (CDI)

11.2.2Color

Meaning

Off

Communication not active.

White

Communication active.

Off

Not connected or no connection established.

Yellow

Connected and connection established.

Flashing yellow

Service interface active.

Sensor connection housing

Proline 500 – digital
Various light emitting diodes (LED) on the ISEM electronics unit (intelligent sensor
electronics module) in the sensor connection housing provide information about the device
status.

1
64 B Communication
63 A
Communication

2

Alarm

Power

61 L+
62 L-

Power

3

A0029699

1
2
3

Communication
Device status
Supply voltage

LED

Meaning1

Communication

White

Communication active.

2

Device status (normal
operation)

Red

Error

Flashing red

Warning

Device status (during
start-up)Flashes red slowly

If > 30 seconds: problem with the boot loader.

Flashes red quickly

If > 30 seconds: compatibility problem whenreading the firmware.

Supply voltage

Green

Supply voltage is ok.

OffSupply voltage is off or too low.

2

3

144

Color

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

11.3

Diagnostic information on local display

11.3.1

Diagnostic message

Faults detected by the self-monitoring system of the measuring device are displayed as adiagnostic message in alternation with the operational display.
Operational display in alarm condition

Diagnostic message

2 1

XXXXXXXXX

S

20.50

S801

3
4

Supply voltage

XX

X

S

XXXXXXXXX

i

Menu

5
A0029426-EN

1
2
3
4
5

Status signal
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
Short text
Operating elements

If two or more diagnostic events are pending simultaneously, only the message of thediagnostic event with the highest priority is shown.
Other diagnostic events that have occurred can be displayed in the Diagnostics menu:• Via parameter →  158• Via submenus →  158
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
The status signals are categorized according to VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107: F = Failure, C = Function Check, S = Out of Specification, M= Maintenance Required
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification
The device is being operated:• Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)• Outside of the configuration carried out by the user (e.g. maximum flow in parameter
20 mA value)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.

Endress+Hauser

145

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostic behavior
SymbolMeaning
Alarm• Measurement is interrupted.
• Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition.
• A diagnostic message is generated.
Warning• Measurement is resumed.
• The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected.
• A diagnostic message is generated.

Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you byproviding information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Diagnostic information
Diagnostic code
Diagnostic
behavior

Status signal

Diagnostic
numberShort text

↓

↓

↓

441

Curr.output 1

ExampleA0013962

A0013958

NAMUR
NE 1073-digit number

Operating elements
Operating key

MeaningPlus key
In menu, submenu
Opens the message about the remedial measures.
Enter key
In menu, submenu
Opens the operating menu.

146

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

11.3.2

Calling up remedial measures

XXXXXXXXX

S

20.50
X

S

XXXXXXXXX

S801
Supply voltage
i

XX

Menu

1.

1

Diagnostic list
Diagnostics 1

S

S801 Supply voltage

Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
2.
2
4
6

Supply voltage(ID:203)
S801 0d00h02m25s
Increase supply voltage

35

3.
A0029431-EN

 40

Message for remedial measures

1
2
3
4
5
6

Diagnostic information
Short text
Service ID
Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
Operation time when error occurred
Remedial measures

1.

The user is in the diagnostic message.
Press  ( symbol).
 The Diagnostic list submenu opens.

2.

Select the desired diagnostic event with  or  and press  .
 The message about the remedial measures opens.

3.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message about the remedial measures closes.

The user is in the Diagnostics menu at an entry for a diagnostics event, e.g. in the
Diagnostic list submenu or Previous diagnostics parameter.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Press .
 The message for the remedial measures for the selected diagnostic event opens.

2.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message for the remedial measures closes.

147

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

11.4

Diagnostic information in the web browser

11.4.1

Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed in the Web browser on thehome page once the user has logged on.
1

2

3
A0031056

1
2
3

Status area with status signal
Diagnostic information
Remedial measures with service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:• Via parameter →  158• Via submenu →  158
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification
The device is being operated:• Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)• Outside of the configuration carried out by the user (e.g. maximum flow in parameter
20 mA value)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.

The status signals are categorized in accordance with VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107.

148

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

11.4.2

Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can berectified quickly. These measures are displayed in red along with the diagnostic event andthe related diagnostic information.

Endress+Hauser

149

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

11.5

Diagnostic information in FieldCare or DeviceCare

11.5.1

Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed on the home page of theoperating tool once the connection has been established.
1
Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx

Mass flow:

12.34

kg/h

Device tag:

Volume flow:

12.34

m³/h

Xxxxxxx

Status signal:

Function check (C)XxxxxxDiagnostics 1:

C485 Simu...

P
P

Remedy information:

Deactivate...

P

Access status tooling:

Mainenance+Operation

+

Setup

+

Diagnostics+

ExpertFailure (F)2Function check (C)Diagnostics 1:

C485 Simulation measured vari...

Remedy information:

Deactivate Simulation (Service...

3

Out of spezification (S)Maintenance required (M)A0021799-EN

1
2
3

Status area with status signal →  145
Diagnostic information →  146
Remedial measures with service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:• Via parameter →  158• Via submenu →  158
Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you byproviding information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Diagnostic information
Diagnostic code
Diagnostic
behavior

Status signal

Diagnostic
numberShort text

↓

↓

↓

441

Curr.output 1

ExampleA0013962

A0013958

NAMUR
NE 107150

3-digit number

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

11.5.2

Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can berectified quickly:• On the home page
Remedy information is displayed in a separate field below the diagnostics information.
• In the Diagnostics menu
Remedy information can be called up in the working area of the user interface.
The user is in the Diagnostics menu.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Call up the desired parameter.

2.

On the right in the working area, mouse over the parameter.
 A tool tip with remedy information for the diagnostic event appears.

151Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

11.6

Adapting the diagnostic information

11.6.1

Adapting the diagnostic behavior

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific diagnostic behavior at thefactory. The user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the
Diagnostic behavior submenu.
Expert → System → Diagnostic handling → Diagnostic behavior
0723-1/ ../Diagn. behavior
Diagnostic no. 044

WarningDiagnostic no. 274
Diagnostic no. 801
A0014048-EN

 41

Taking the example of the local display

You can assign the following options to the diagnostic number as the diagnostic behavior:
Options

Description

Alarm

The device stops measurement. The signal outputs and totalizers assume the definedalarm condition. A diagnostic message is generated.
The background lighting changes to red.

Warning

The device continues to measure. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A
diagnostic message is generated.

Logbook entry only

The device continues to measure. The diagnostic message is only displayed in the Eventlogbook submenu (Event list submenu) and is not displayed in alternating sequencewith the operational display.

Off

The diagnostic event is ignored, and no diagnostic message is generated or entered.

11.6.2

Adapting the status signal

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific status signal at the factory. The
user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the Diagnostic
event category submenu.
Expert → Communication → Diagnostic event category
Available status signals
Configuration as per HART 7 Specification (Condensed Status), in accordance with
NAMUR NE107.
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
A0013956

Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
A0013959

A0013958

152

Out of specification
The device is being operated:• Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)• Outside of the configuration carried out by the user (e.g. maximum flow in parameter
20 mA value)

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

SymbolMeaning
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.
A0013957

Has no effect on the condensed status.
A0023076

Endress+Hauser

153

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

11.7

Overview of diagnostic information

The amount of diagnostic information and the number of measured variables affected
increase if the measuring device has one or more application packages.
In the case of some items of diagnostic information, the status signal and the
diagnostic behavior can be changed. Change the diagnostic information →  152
Diagnostic
numberShort text

Remedy instructions

Statussignal[from thefactory]

Diagnostic
behavior[from thefactory]

Diagnostic of sensor
004

Sensor error

Change sensor

F

Alarm

082

Data storage

1. Check module connections
2. Change electronic modules

F

Alarm

083

Memory content

1. Restart device
2. Restore HistoROM S-DAT backup('Device reset' parameter)
3. Replace HistoROM S-DAT

F

Alarm

144

Sensor drift

1. Check sensor
2. Replace sensor

F

Alarm 1)

Diagnostic of electronic

154

201

Device failure

Restart device

F

Alarm

242

Software incompatible

1. Check software
2. Flash or change main electronics
module

F

Alarm

252

Modules incompatible

1. Check electronic modules
2. Check if correct modules areavailable (e.g. NEx, Ex)
3. Replace electronic modules

F

Alarm

252

Modules incompatible

1. Check if correct electronic modul
is plugged
2. Replace electronic module

F

Alarm

262

Sensor electronic
connection faulty

1. Check or replace connection cable F
between sensor electronic module(ISEM) and main electronics
2. Check or replace ISEM or mainelectronics

Alarm

270

Main electronic failure

Change main electronic module

F

Alarm

271

Main electronic failure

1. Restart device
2. Change main electronic module

F

Alarm

272

Main electronic failure

Restart device

F

Alarm

273

Main electronic failure

Change electronic

F

Alarm

275

I/O module 1 to n
defective

Change I/O module

F

Alarm

276

I/O module 1 to n faulty

1. Restart device
2. Change I/O module

F

Alarm

281

Electronic initialization

Firmware update active, please wait! F

Alarm

283

Memory content

Reset device

F

Alarm

283

Memory content

Restart device

F

Alarm

302

Device verification inprogress

Device verification active, please
wait.

C

WarningEndress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic
numberShort text

Remedy instructions

Statussignal[from thefactory]

Diagnostic
behavior[from thefactory]303

I/O 1 to n configuration
changed1. Apply I/O module configuration(parameter 'Apply I/O
configuration')
2. Afterwards reload device
description and check wiring

M

Warning311

Electronic failure

1. Do not reset device
2. Contact service

M

Warning332

Writing in HistoROM
backup failed

Replace user interface board
Ex d/XP: replace transmitter

F

Alarm

361

I/O module 1 to n faulty

1. Restart device
2. Check electronic modules
3. Change I/O Modul or mainelectronics

F

Alarm

372

Sensor electronic (ISEM)
faulty1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace sensor electronic module(ISEM)

F

Alarm

373

Sensor electronic (ISEM)
faultyTransfer data or reset device

F

Alarm

375

I/O- 1 to ncommunication failed

1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace module rack inclusiveelectronic modules

F

Alarm

378

Supply voltage ISEM
faultyCheck supply voltage to the ISEM

F

Alarm

382

Data storage

1. Insert T-DAT
2. Replace T-DAT

F

Alarm

383

Memory content

1. Restart device
2. Delete T-DAT via 'Reset device'
parameter
3. Replace T-DAT

F

Alarm

387

HistoROM data faulty

Contact service organization

F

Alarm

Diagnostic of configuration

Endress+Hauser

330

Flash file invalid

1. Update firmware of device
2. Restart device

M

Warning

331

Firmware update failed

1. Update firmware of device
2. Restart deviceF

Warning

410

Data transfer

1. Check connection
2. Retry data transfer

F

Alarm

412

Processing download

Download active, please waitCWarning

431

Trim 1 to n

Carry out trim

C

Warning437

Configuration
incompatible

Restart device

F

Alarm

438

Dataset1. Check data set file
2. Check device configuration
3. Up- and download new
configuration

M

Warning

441

Current output 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check current output settings

S

Warning 1)

442

Frequency output 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check frequency output settings

S

Warning 1)

443

Pulse output 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check pulse output settings

S

Warning 1)

155

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostic
numberShort text

Remedy instructions

Statussignal[from thefactory]

Diagnostic
behavior[from thefactory]444

Current input 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check current input settings

S

Warning 1)

453

Flow override

Deactivate flow overrideC

Warning

484

Failure mode simulation

Deactivate simulation

C

Alarm

485

Measured variable
simulation

Deactivate simulationC

Warning

486

Current input 1 to nsimulation

Deactivate simulationC

Warning491

Current output 1 to nsimulation

Deactivate simulationC

Warning492

Simulation frequency
output 1 to n

Deactivate simulation frequency
outputC

Warning493

Simulation pulse output
1 to nDeactivate simulation pulse output

C

Warning494

Switch output simulation
1 to nDeactivate simulation switch output

C

Warning495

Diagnostic event
simulation

Deactivate simulationC

Warning496

Status input simulation

Deactivate simulation status input

C

Warning520

I/O 1 to n hardware
configuration invalid

1. Check I/O hardware
configuration
2. Replace wrong I/O module
3. Plug the module of double pulse
output on correct slot

F

Alarm

537

Configuration

1. Check IP addresses in network
2. Change IP addressF

Warning539

Flow computerconfiguration incorrect

1. Check input value (pressure,temperature)
2. Check allowed values of themedium properties

S

Alarm

594

Relay output simulation

Deactivate simulation switch output

C

WarningDiagnostic of process

156

803

Current loop

1. Check wiring
2. Change I/O module

F

Alarm

832

Electronic temperature
too high

Reduce ambient temperatureS

Warning 1)

833

Electronic temperature
too low

Increase ambient temperatureS

Warning 1)

834

Process temperature too
highReduce process temperatureS

Warning 1)

835

Process temperature too
low

Increase process temperatureS

Warning 1)

842

Process limit

Low flow cut off active!
1. Check low flow cut off
configuration

S

Warning 1)

882

Input signal

1. Check input configuration
2. Check external device or process
conditions

F

Alarm

941

Flow velocity too high

1. Check process cond.
2. Increase system pressure

S

Alarm

961

Delta temperature

Check flow rate

S

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic
number1)

Endress+Hauser

Short text

Remedy instructions

Statussignal[from thefactory]

Diagnostic
behavior[from thefactory]976

Mass flow out ofcalibrated range

1. Check process cond.
2. Increase system pressureS

Warning 1)

977

Reverse flow detected

Check flow direction

S

Warning 1)

979

Unstable process
conditions

1. Check process cond.
2. Increase system pressureS

Warning 1)

Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

157

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

11.8

Pending diagnostic events

The Diagnostics menu allows the user to view the current diagnostic event and theprevious diagnostic event separately.
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  147• Via web browser →  149• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  151• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  151
Other pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu→  158
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu

 Diagnostics
Actual diagnostics→  158

Previous diagnostics→  158

Operating time from restart→  158

Operating time→  158

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Actual diagnostics

Prerequisite
A diagnostic event has occurred.

Description

User interface

Shows the current occured diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic
information.

Symbol for diagnostic
behavior, diagnostic codeand short message.

two or more messages occur
 Ifsimultaneously,
the message withthe highest priority is shown on
the display.
Previous diagnostics

Two diagnostic events have alreadyoccurred.

Shows the diagnostic event that
occurred prior to the current diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic
information.

Symbol for diagnostic
behavior, diagnostic codeand short message.

Operating time from restart–Shows the time the device has been in
operation since the last device restart.

Days (d), hours (h),minutes (m) and seconds(s)Operating time–

Indicates how long the device has beenin operation.

Days (d), hours (h),minutes (m) and seconds
(s)

11.9

Diagnostic list

Up to 5 currently pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list
submenu along with the associated diagnostic information. If more than 5 diagnostic
events are pending, the events with the highest priority are shown on the display.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Diagnostic list
158

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostics and troubleshooting/ ../Diagnose list
Diagnostics
F273 Main electronic
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
A0014006-EN

 42

Taking the example of the local display

To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  147• Via web browser →  149• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  151• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  151

Endress+Hauser

159

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

11.10 Event logbook
11.10.1 Reading out the event logbook
A chronological overview of the event messages that have occurred is provided in the
Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics menu → Event logbook submenu → Event list
/ ../Eventlist
F
I1091 Config. change
I1157 Mem.err. ev.list
0d01h19m10s
F311 Electr. failure
A0014008-EN

 43

Taking the example of the local display• A maximum of 20 event messages can be displayed in chronological order.
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled in the device,
the event list can contain up to 100 entries .
The event history includes entries for:• Diagnostic events →  154• Information events →  161
In addition to the operation time of its occurrence, each event is also assigned a symbolthat indicates whether the event has occurred or is ended:• Diagnostic event• : Occurrence of the event• : End of the event• Information event
: Occurrence of the event
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  147• Via web browser →  149• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  151• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  151
For filtering the displayed event messages →  160

11.10.2 Filtering the event logbook
Using the Filter options parameter you can define which category of event message isdisplayed in the Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Event logbook → Filter options
Filter categories• All• Failure (F)• Function check (C)• Out of specification (S)• Maintenance required (M)• Information (I)160

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

11.10.3 Overview of information events
Unlike a diagnostic event, an information event is displayed in the event logbook only andnot in the diagnostic list.
Info number

Endress+Hauser

Info name

I1000--------(Device ok)

I1079

Sensor changed

I1089

Power on

I1090

Configuration reset

I1091

Configuration changed

I1092

HistoROM backup deleted

I1137

Electronic changed

I1151

History reset

I1155

Reset electronic temperature

I1156

Memory error trend

I1157

Memory error event list

I1221

Zero point adjust failure

I1222

Zero point adjustment ok

I1256

Display: access status changed

I1264

Safety sequence aborted

I1278

I/O module restarted

I1335

Firmware changed

I1361

Web server: login failed

I1397

Fieldbus: access status changed

I1398

CDI: access status changed

I1444

Device verification passed

I1445

Device verification failed

I1457

Measurement error verification failed

I1459

I/O module verification failed

I1461

Sensor verification failed

I1462

Sensor electronic module verific. failed

I1512

Download started

I1513

Download finished

I1514

Upload started

I1515

Upload finished

I1554

Safety sequence started

I1555

Safety sequence confirmed

I1556

Safety mode off

I1618

I/O module 2 replaced

I1619

I/O module 3 replaced

I1621

I/O module 4 replaced

I1622

Calibration changed

I1624

Reset all totalizers

I1625

Write protection activated161

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Info number

162

Info name

I1626

Write protection deactivatedI1627

Web server: login successful

I1628

Display: login successful

I1629

CDI: login successful

I1631

Web server access changed

I1632

Display: login failed

I1633

CDI: login failed

I1634

Reset to factory settings

I1635

Reset to delivery settings

I1639

Max. switch cycles number reached

I1649

Hardware write protection activated

I1650

Hardware write protection deactivated

I1712

New flash file received

I1725

Sensor electronic module (ISEM) changed

I1726

Configuration backup failed

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

11.11 Resetting the measuring device
The entire device configuration or some of the configuration can be reset to a defined statewith the Device reset parameter (→  116).

11.11.1 Function range of "Device reset" parameter
Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

To delivery settings

Every parameter for which a customer-specific default setting was ordered is resetto the customer-specific value. All other parameters are reset to the factory setting.

Restart device

The restart resets every parameter with data stored in volatile memory (RAM) to
the factory setting (e.g. measured value data). The device configuration remains
unchanged.

Restore S-DAT backup

Restores the data that is saved on the S-DAT. Additional information: This function
can be used to resolve the memory issue "083 Memory content inconsistent" or to
restore the S-DAT data when a new S-DAT has been installed.

 This option is displayed only in an alarm condition.

Endress+Hauser

163

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

11.12 Device information
The Device information submenu contains all parameters that display different
information for device identification.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Device information‣ Device information
Device tag→  164

Serial number→  164

Firmware version→  164

Device name→  164

Order code→  165

Extended order code 1→  165

Extended order code 2→  165

Extended order code 3→  165

ENP version→  165

Device revision→  165

Device ID→  165

Device type→  165

Manufacturer ID→  165

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Factory setting

Device tag

Shows name of measuring point.

Max. 32 characters, such as
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /).

–Serial number

Shows the serial number of the measuring
device.

Max. 11-digit character string
comprising letters andnumbers.

–

Firmware version

Shows the device firmware version installed.

Character string in the format
xx.yy.zz–

Device nameShows the name of the transmitter.

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters–name can be found on the The
nameplate of the transmitter.

164

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Parameter

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Description

User interface

Factory setting

Manufacturer

Displays the manufacturer.

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters–

Order code

Shows the device order code.

Character string composed ofletters, numbers and certain
punctuation marks (e.g. /).

–Extended order code 1

Shows the 1st part of the extended ordercode.

Character string–

Extended order code 2

Shows the 2nd part of the extended ordercode.

Character string–

Character string–

extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.
Extended order code 3

Shows the 3rd part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

ENP version

Shows the version of the electronic
nameplate (ENP).

Character string–

Device revision

Shows the device revision with which thedevice is registered with the HART
Communication Foundation.

2-digit hexadecimal number

0x1

Device ID

Shows the device ID for identifying thedevice in a HART network.

6-digit hexadecimal number–

Device typeShows the device type with which themeasuring device is registered with the
HART Communication Foundation.

2-digit hexadecimal number

0x1160 (for t-mass 300/500)

Manufacturer ID

Shows the manufacturer ID device isregistered with the HART Communication
Foundation.

2-digit hexadecimal number

0x11 (for Endress+Hauser)

Endress+Hauser

165

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

11.13 Firmware history
It is possible to flash the firmware to the current version or the previous version using
the service interface.
For the compatibility of the firmware version with the previous version, the installed
device description files and operating tools, observe the information about the device
in the "Manufacturer's information" document.
The manufacturer's information is available:• In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser web site: www.endress.com →Downloads• Specify the following details:• Text search: Manufacturer's information• Media type: Documentation – Technical Documentation

166

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Maintenance

12

Maintenance

12.1

Maintenance tasks

No special maintenance work is required.

12.1.1

Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do notattack the surface of the housing or the seals.

12.1.2

Sensing element cleaning

Cleaning the sensing element
The measuring device can be removed for cleaning.
Use key size 36 mm (1.42 in) to remove the sensor.

LWARNING
Injury from measuring device being ejected!

‣ Ensure the system is depressurized before commencing the cleaning work.
NOTICE
Damage to the sensing element!
‣ Make sure the sensing elements do not hit against anything.
NOTICEThe use of unsuitable equipment or cleaning liquids can damage the measuring
device.
‣ Do not use pigs to clean the pipe.
‣ Use an oil-free cleaning agent that does not form a film to clean the sensor.
NOTICE
Damage to the sealing surfaces!
‣ Make sure the sealing surfaces do not hit against anything.
1.

Ensure the system is unpressurized.

2.

Release the compression fitting of the measuring device.

3.

Carefully remove the measuring device from the process pipe.

4.

NOTICEThe protective guard protects the sensing element from damage!
‣ Do not remove the protective guard.
Gently clean the sensing elements using a soft brush.

5.

Carefully insert the measuring device into the process pipe.
 Make sure the measuring device is aligned correctly.

6.

For PEEK ferrules:
Tighten compression fitting with 1 turn.

7.

For metal ferrules:
Tighten compression fitting with a ¼ turn.
Increase the pressure in the piping system and check for leaks once the desiredpressure is reached.

Endress+Hauser

167

Maintenance

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

12.1.3

Recalibration

The long-term stability of a measuring device depends on the integrity of the sensor,
among other things. Impurities can also cause a coating to form on the sensor, which cancause a change in the measuring signal. Therefore, if the sensor is used in applications inwhich impurities (such as oil residue or dust) can occur, it is advisable to check the sensor
for contamination at regular intervals and clean it if necessary (see →  167). Theintervals depend on the type, condition and extent of the contamination.
Process conditions such as thermal shocks or constant variations in temperatures cancreate the conditions in which the measuring signal drifts over time. A recalibration canrectify these undesired changes in the measuring signal and restore the original measuring
state.
Determining the recalibration intervals:• In the event of critical measurements and in order to determine the recalibrationintervals, a calibration check should be performed once a year.
The next recalibration can then be scheduled earlier or later depending on the results ofthese checks.
• A recalibration every three years is recommended for non-critical applications or for use
in clean and dry gases.
• Heartbeat Verification can be used to help determine when a recalibration should be
performed. By performing verifications regularly, it is possible to compare theverification results with the initial values determined at the factory. If these values
deviate from one another, this can indicate that the device needs to be recalibrated.

12.2

Measuring and test equipment

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of measuring and test equipment, such as W@M or
device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.
List of some of the measuring and testing equipment: →  174

12.3

Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of services for maintenance such as recalibration,
maintenance service or device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

168

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Repair13

Repair

13.1

General information

13.1.1

Repair and conversion concept

The Endress+Hauser repair and conversion concept provides for the following:• The measuring devices have a modular design.
• Spare parts are grouped into logical kits with the associated Installation Instructions.
• Repairs are carried out by Endress+Hauser Service or by appropriately trained customers.
• Certified devices can only be converted to other certified devices by Endress+Hauser
Service or at the factory.

13.1.2

Notes for repair and conversion

For repair and modification of a measuring device, observe the following notes:‣ Use only original Endress+Hauser spare parts.
‣ Carry out the repair according to the Installation Instructions.
‣ Observe the applicable standards, federal/national regulations, Ex documentation (XA)
and certificates.

‣ Document every repair and each conversion and enter them into the W@M life cycle
management database and Netilion Analytics.

13.2

Spare parts

Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer):
All the spare parts for the measuring device, along with the order code, are listed here andcan be ordered. If available, users can also download the associated Installation
Instructions.
Measuring device serial number:• Is located on the nameplate of the device.
• Can be read out via the Serial number parameter (→  164) in the Device
information submenu.

13.3

Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide range of services.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

13.4

ReturnThe requirements for safe device return can vary depending on the device type andnational legislation.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Refer to the web page for information:
http://www.endress.com/support/return-material
 Select the region.

2.

Return the device if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if the wrong
device was ordered or delivered.

169

Repair

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

13.5

Disposal

If required by the Directive 2012/19/EU on waste electrical and electronic equipment(WEEE), the product is marked with the depicted symbol in order to minimize thedisposal of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste. Do not dispose of products bearing thismarking as unsorted municipal waste. Instead, return them to the manufacturer for
disposal under the applicable conditions.

13.5.1
1.

Removing the measuring device

Switch off the device.

LWARNING
Danger to persons from process conditions!
‣ Beware of hazardous process conditions such as pressure in the measuring device, hightemperatures or aggressive media.
2.

Carry out the mounting and connection steps from the "Mounting the measuring
device" and "Connecting the measuring device" sections in reverse order. Observe thesafety instructions.

13.5.2

Disposing of the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger to personnel and environment from fluids that are hazardous to health.
‣ Ensure that the measuring device and all cavities are free of fluid residues that arehazardous to health or the environment, e.g. substances that have permeated into
crevices or diffused through plastic.
Observe the following notes during disposal:‣ Observe valid federal/national regulations.
‣ Ensure proper separation and reuse of the device components.

170

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Accessories

14

Accessories

Various accessories, which can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress+Hauser, are available for the device. Detailed information on the order code in question isavailable from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of theEndress+Hauser website: www.endress.com.

14.1

Device-specific accessories

14.1.1For the transmitter

Accessories

Description

Transmitter
Proline 500 – digital

Transmitter for replacement or storage. Use the order code to define the following
specifications:• Approvals• Output• Input• Display/operation• Housing• Software
500 – digital transmitter: Proline
Order number: 6X5BXX-*********A
500 transmitter for replacement: Proline
It is essential to specify the serial number of the current transmitter whenordering. On the basis of the serial number, the device-specific data (e.g.
calibration factors) of the replaced device can be used for the newtransmitter.

 Proline 500 – digital transmitter: Installation Instructions EA01287D
External WLAN antenna

External WLAN antenna with 1.5 m (59.1 in) connecting cable and two angle
brackets. Order code for "Accessory enclosed", option P8 "Wireless antenna widearea".
The external WLAN antenna is not suitable for use in hygienic • applications.
• Additional information regarding the WLAN interface →  71.

 Order number: 71351317
 Installation Instructions EA01238D
Pipe mounting set

Pipe mounting set for transmitter.
500 – digital transmitter Proline
Order number: 71346427
 Installation Instructions EA01195D

Weather protection coverTransmitter
Proline 500 – digital

Endress+Hauser

Is used to protect the measuring device from the effects of the weather: e.g.
rainwater, excess heating from direct sunlight.
500 – digital transmitter Proline
Order number: 71343504
 Installation Instructions EA01191D

171

Accessories

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Display guard
Proline 500 – digital

Is used to protect the display against impact or scoring, for example from sand indesert areas.

 Order number: 71228792
 Installation Instructions EA01093D
Connecting cable
Proline 500 – digital
Sensor –Transmitter

The connecting cable can be ordered directly with the measuring device (order codefor "Cable, sensor connection) or as an accessory (order number ).
The following cable lengths are available: order code for "Cable, sensor connection"• Option B: 20 m (65 ft)• Option E: User-configurable up to 50 mmax.
• Option F: User-configurable up to 165 ftmax.
possible cable length for a Proline 500 – digital connecting cable:
 Maximum
300 m (1 000 ft)

14.1.2For the sensor

Accessories

Description

Mounting boss

Order code for "Accessory enclosed"• Option PC "Mounting boss, G1""
• Option PD "Mounting boss, 1" NPT"
• Option PE "Mounting boss, G¾""
• Option PF "Mounting boss, ¾" NPT" Can be ordered separately: order code DK6MB
Cold tap (ambientpressure)

Order code for "Accessory enclosed"• Option PR "Cold tap G1", ambient pressure"• Option PS "Cold tap 1" NPT, ambient pressure"• Option PT "Cold tap G¾", ambient pressure"• Option PU "Cold tap ¾" NPT, ambient pressure" Can be ordered separately: order code DK6ML
Hot tap (low pressure)

Order code for "Accessory enclosed"• Option PG "Hot tap G1", low pressure max. 4.5 bar/65 psig"• Option PH "Hot tap 1" NPT, low pressure max. 4.5 bar/65 psig"• Option PK "Hot tap G¾", low pressure max. 4.5 bar/65 psig"• Option PL "Hot tap ¾" NPT, low pressure max. 4.5 bar/65 psig"
set contains mounting boss (process connection), sensor
 Mounting
connection with safety chain and ball valve. To insert or remove the sensor atprocess pressures up to max. 4.5 barg (65 psi).

172

If the accessory is ordered separately, individual combinations can beselected. Order code DK6003

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Accessories

Hot tap (medium
pressure)

Order code for "Accessory enclosed"• Option PI "Hot tap G1", medium pressure max. 16 bar/230 psig"• Option PJ "Hot tap 1" NPT, medium pressure max. 16 bar/230 psig"• Option PM "Hot tap G¾", medium pressure max. 16 bar/230 psig"• Option PN "Hot tap ¾" NPT, medium pressure max. 16 bar/230 psig"
set contains mounting boss (process connection), sensor
 Mounting
connection, ball valve and extractor assembly. To insert or remove the sensor
at process pressures up to max. 16 barg (230 psi).


Flow conditioner

If the accessory is ordered separately, individual combinations can beselected. Order code DK6003

 Can be ordered separately: order code DK6004
Available for the following pipe diameters:• DN 80 (3")• DN 100 (4")• DN 150 (6")• DN 200 (8")• DN 250 (10")• DN 300 (12")
Available for the following process connections:• PN10, EN1092-1• PN16, EN1092-1• PN25, EN1092-1• PN40, EN1092-1• Cl.150, ASME B16.5• Cl.300, ASME B16.5• 10K, JIS B2220• 20K, JIS B2220

 Screws and seals are not included in the delivery.
14.2

Communication-specific accessories

Accessories

Description

Commubox FXA195
HART

For intrinsically safe HART communication with FieldCare via the USB port.

HART Loop Converter
HMX50

 Technical Information TI00404F
Is used to evaluate and convert dynamic HART process variables to analog current
signals or limit values.
Information TI00429F
 •• Technical
Operating Instructions BA00371F

Fieldgate FXA42

Transmission of the measured values of connected 4 to 20 mA analog measuring
devices, as well as digital measuring devices
Technical Information TI01297S
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01778S• Product page: www.endress.com/fxa42

Field Xpert SMT50

The Field Xpert SMT70 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant
asset management in non-hazardous areas. It is suitable for commissioning andmaintenance staff to manage field instruments with a digital communicationinterface and to record progress.
This tablet PC is designed as an all-in-one solution with a preinstalled driver libraryand is an easy-to-use, touch-sensitive tool which can be used to manage field
instruments throughout their entire life cycle.
Technical Information TI01342S
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01709S• Product page: www.endress.com/smt50

Endress+Hauser

173

Accessories

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Field Xpert SMT70

The Field Xpert SMT70 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant
asset management in hazardous and non-hazardous areas. It is suitable forcommissioning and maintenance staff to manage field instruments with a digitalcommunication interface and to record progress.
This tablet PC is designed as an all-in-one solution with a preinstalled driver libraryand is an easy-to-use, touch-sensitive tool which can be used to manage field
instruments throughout their entire life cycle.
Technical Information TI01342S
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01709S• Product page: www.endress.com/smt70

Field Xpert SMT77

The Field Xpert SMT77 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant
asset management in areas categorized as Ex Zone 1.
Technical Information TI01418S
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01923S• Product page: www.endress.com/smt77

14.3

Service-specific accessories

Accessories

Description

Applicator

Software for selecting and sizing Endress+Hauser measuring devices:• Choice of measuring devices for industrial requirements• Calculation of all the necessary data for identifying the optimum flowmeter:
e.g. nominal diameter, pressure loss, flow velocity and accuracy.
• Graphic illustration of the calculation results• Determination of the partial order code, administration, documentation andaccess to all project-related data and parameters over the entire life cycle ofa project.
Applicator is available:• Via the Internet: https://portal.endress.com/webapp/applicator• As a downloadable DVD for local PC installation.

W@M

W@M Life Cycle Management
Improved productivity with information at your fingertips. Data relevant to aplant and its components is generated from the first stages of planning andduring the asset’s complete life cycle.
W@M Life Cycle Management is an open and flexible information platform
with online and on-site tools. Instant access for your staff to current, in-depth
data shortens your plant’s engineering time, speeds up procurement processes
and increases plant uptime.
Combined with the right services, W@M Life Cycle Management boosts
productivity in every phase. For more information, see:www.endress.com/lifecyclemanagement

FieldCare

FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser.
It can configure all smart field units in your system and helps you manage
them. By using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way ofchecking their status and condition.

 Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S
DeviceCare

Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.

 Innovation brochure IN01047S

174

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Accessories

14.4

System components

Accessories

Description

Memograph M graphic
data manager

The Memograph M graphic data manager provides information on all the relevantmeasured variables. Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values aremonitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256 MB
internal memory and also on a SD card or USB stick.
Information TI00133R
 •• Technical
Operating Instructions BA00247R

Ceraphant PTC31B

The pressure transmitter for measuring the absolute and gauge pressure in gases,
steam, liquids and dusts. It can be used to read in the operating pressure value.
Technical Information TI01130P
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01270P

Cerabar PMC21

The pressure transmitter for measuring the absolute and gauge pressure in gases,
steam, liquids and dusts. It can be used to read in the operating pressure value.
Technical Information TI01133P
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01271P

Cerabar S PMC71

The pressure transmitter for measuring the absolute and gauge pressure of gases,
steam and liquids. It can be used to read in the operating pressure value.
Information TI00383P
 •• Technical
Operating Instructions BA00271P

Endress+Hauser

175

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

15

Technical data

15.1

Application

The measuring device is intended only for the flow measurement of gases.
To ensure that the device remains in proper operating condition for its service life, use themeasuring device only for media against which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.

15.2

Function and system design

Measuring principle

Mass flow measurement based on thermal measuring principle.

Measuring system

The measuring system consists of a transmitter and a sensor. The transmitter and sensor
are mounted in physically separate locations. They are interconnected by connecting
cables.
Information on the structure of the device →  14

176

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

15.3
Measured variable

Input

Measured process variables• Mass flow
• Temperature
Calculated process variables• Corrected volume flow
• Volume flow
• FAD volume flow
• Flow velocity• Calorific value• 2nd temperature heat difference• Heat flow
• Energy flow
• Density
Process variables available for order
Order code for "Sensor version":• Option SB "Bidirectional" measures the flow in both directions(»positive« and »negative« flow) and totalizes the flow in both directions. The device iscalibrated in both directions.
• Option SC "Reverse flow detection" only measures the flow in the positive direction. The
reverse flow is detected by the device but is not totalized. The device is only calibrated in
the positive forward flow direction.
Order code for "Application package":
Option EV "Second gas group" enables the configuration of two different standard
gases/gas mixtures in the device and allows the user to switch from one gas group toanother using the status input or (if available) via bus communication.

Measuring range

The available measuring range depends on the choice of gas and size of the pipe. Eachmeasuring device is calibrated individually with air under reference operating conditions.
No recalibration is required in the case of customer-specific gases, as the device's Gas
Engine functionality converts from air to these gases.
The measuring ranges calibrated for air are indicated in the following section. For
information on other gases and process conditions, contact your sales organization or use
the Applicator selection software.
SI units• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube", option SA "Unidirectional;
stainless steel; stainless steel"• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube", option HA "Unidirectional; Alloy;
stainless steel"
DN[mm]Endress+Hauser

Full scale value [kg/h](Air, 20°C, 1.013 bar a)

Full scale value [Nm3/h](Air, 0°C, 1.013 bar a)

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

80

21

2 086

16

1 613

100

33

3 260

25

2 521

150

73

7 335

57

5 672

200

130

13 040101

10 084250

204

20 375158

15 757177

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

DN
[mm]

Full scale value [kg/h](Air, 20°C, 1.013 bar a)

Full scale value [Nm3/h](Air, 0°C, 1.013 bar a)

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

300

293

29 340227

22 689400522

52 160403

40 337500

815

81 500630

63 026600

1 174

117 360908

90 758700

1 597

159 740

1 235

123 531

1 000

3 260

326 000

2 521

252 105

1 500

7 335

733 501

5 672

567 236• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option SB "Bidirectional; stainlesssteel; stainless steel"• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option SC "Reverse flow detection;
stainless steel; stainless steel"
DN[mm]

Full scale value [kg/h](Air, 20°C, 1.013 bar a)

Full scale value [Nm3/h](Air, 0°C, 1.013 bar a)

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

80

13

1 310

10

1 012

100

23

2 310

17

1 786

150

47

4 750

36

3 673

200

84

8 475

65

6 553

250

132

13 250102

10 246300

190

19 000146

14 692400

337

33 750260

26 099500

530

53 000409

40 986600

762

76 250589

58 966700

1 038

103 820802

80 286

1 000

2 119

211 900

1 638

163 868

1 500

4 767

476 7503 686

368 683

US units• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube", option SA "Unidirectional;
stainless steel; stainless steel"• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube", option HA "Unidirectional; Alloy;
stainless steel"
DN
[in]

178

Full scale value [lb/h](Air, 68°F, 14.7 psi a)

Full scale value [SCFM](Air, 59°F, 14.7 psi a)

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

3

42

4 173

9

909

4

74

7 419

16

1 616

6

167

16 693

36

3 636

8

297

29 677

65

6 464

10

464

46 371101

10 10012668

66 774145

14 544Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

DN
[in]

Full scale value [lb/h](Air, 68°F, 14.7 psi a)

Full scale value [SCFM](Air, 59°F, 14.7 psi a)

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

16

1 187

118 709259

25 85620

1 855

185 482404

40 40024

2 671

267 094582

58 17628

3 635

363 545792

79 18440

7 419

741 929

1 616

161 60060

16 693

1 669 340

3 636

363 600• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option SB "Bidirectional; stainlesssteel; stainless steel"• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option SC "Reverse flow detection;
stainless steel; stainless steel"
DN[in]Full scale value [lb/h](Air, 68°F, 14.7 psi a)

Full scale value [SCFM](Air, 59°F, 14.7 psi a)

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

3

29

2 981

6

648

4

52

5 257

11

1 144

6

108

10 810

23

2 354

8

192

19 287

42

4 200

10

301

30 155

65

6 567

12

432

43 241

94

9 417

16

768

76 810167

16 72920

1 206

120 620262

26 27224

1 735

173 533377

37 797282 362

236 279514

51 46340

4 822

482 253

1 050

105 03960

10 850

1 085 012

2 363

236 326

The flow rates listed are only representative for the calibrated conditions and do notnecessarily reflect the measuring capacity of the measuring device under operating
conditions and the actual pipe internal diameters present on site. To make sure that thecorrect device version and sizing is selected to suit the application, contact the salesorganization or use the Applicator selection software.
Special applications
High gas flow velocities (>70 m/s)
In the case of high gas flow velocities, it is advisable to read in the process pressure
dynamically or to enter the pressure as accurately as possible, as a velocity-dependent
correction is performed.

Endress+Hauser

179

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Light gases (hydrogen, helium)• The reliable measurement of light gases can be difficult due to their very high thermal
conductivity. Depending on the application, the flow rates of light gases are often
particularly slow and the flow profiles are not sufficiently developed. The flows are
frequently in the laminar flow range, while turbulent flow would actually be needed for
optimum measurement.
• Despite loss of accuracy and linearity in applications with light gases and low flow rates,
the device measures with a good degree of repeatability and is therefore suitable formonitoring flow conditions (e.g. leak detection).
• The recommended inlet runs must be doubled for light gases.→  21
Operable flow range• 200:1 with factory calibration• Up to 1000:1 with application-specific adjustment

Input signal

External values
The measuring device provides interfaces which allow values measured externally→  180 to be transmitted to the measuring device:• Analog inputs 4-20 mA• Digital inputs
Pressure values can be transmitted as absolute or gauge pressure. For gauge pressure, theatmospheric pressure must be known or specified by the customer.
HART protocol
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
the HART protocol. The pressure transmitter must support the following protocol-specificfunctions:• HART protocol• Burst mode
Current input
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
the current input →  180.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA
Current input

0/4 to 20 mA (active/passive)

Current span

• 4 to 20 mA (active)• 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)

Resolution

1 µA

Voltage drop

Typically: 0.6 to 2 V for 3.6 to 22 mA (passive)

Maximum input voltage≤ 30 V (passive)

Open-circuit voltage≤ 28.8 V (active)

Possible input variables• Pressure• Temperature• Mol-% (gas analyzer)• External reference flow rate (in-situ adjustment)

Status input

180

Maximum input values• DC –3 to 30 V
• If status input is active (ON): Ri >3 kΩ

Response time

Configurable: 5 to 200 ms

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Endress+Hauser

Technical data

Input signal level• Low signal: DC –3 to +5 V
• High signal: DC 12 to 30 V

Assignable functions• Off• Reset the individual totalizers separately• Reset all totalizers• Flow override• Second gas group• Zero point adjustment

181

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

15.4
Output signal

OutputCurrent output 4 to 20 mA HART
Order code

"Output; input 1" (20):
Option BA: current output 4 to 20 mA HART

Signal mode

Can be set to:• Active• Passive

Current range

Can be set to:• 4 to 20 mA NAMUR• 4 to 20 mA US• 4 to 20 mA• 0 to 20 mA (only if the signal mode is active)• Fixed current

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Maximum input voltage

DC 30 V (passive)

Load

250 to 700 Ω

Resolution

0.38 µA

Damping

Configurable: 0 to 999.9 s

Assignable measured
variables• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• FAD volume flow
• Flow velocity• Temperature• Energy flow
• Pressure• Density• Heat flow
• Electronics temperature• 2nd temperature heat difference
For SIL (application package), only mass flow

Current output 4 to 20 mA HART Ex i

182

Order code

"Output; input 1" (20) choose from:• Option CA: current output 4 to 20 mA HART Ex i passive• Option CC: current output 4 to 20 mA HART Ex i active

Signal mode

Depends on the selected order version.

Current range

Can be set to:• 4 to 20 mA NAMUR• 4 to 20 mA US• 4 to 20 mA• 0 to 20 mA (only if the signal mode is active)• Fixed current

Open-circuit voltage

DC 21.8 V (active)

Maximum input voltage

DC 30 V (passive)

Load• 250 to 400 Ω (active)• 250 to 700 Ω (passive)

Resolution

0.38 µA

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

Damping

Configurable: 0 to 999.9 s

Assignable measured
variables• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• FAD volume flow
• Flow velocity• Temperature• Energy flow
• Pressure• Density• Heat flow
• Electronics temperature• 2nd temperature heat difference
For SIL (application package), only mass flow

Current output 4 to 20 mA
Order code

"Output; input 2" (21), "Output; input 3" (022) or "Output; input 4" (023):
Option B: current output 4 to 20 mA

Signal mode

Can be set to:• Active• Passive

Current span

Can be set to:• 4 to 20 mA NAMUR• 4 to 20 mA US• 4 to 20 mA• 0 to 20 mA (only if the signal mode is active)• Fixed current

Maximum output values

22.5 mA

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Maximum input voltage

DC 30 V (passive)

Load

0 to 700 Ω

Resolution

0.38 µA

Damping

Configurable: 0 to 999.9 s

Assignable measured
variables• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• FAD volume flow
• Flow velocity• Temperature• Energy flow
• Pressure• Density• Heat flow
• Electronics temperature• 2nd temperature heat difference
For SIL (application package), only mass flow

Pulse/frequency/switch output
FunctionCan be configured as pulse, frequency or switch output

VersionOpen collector
Can be set to:• Active• Passive• Passive NAMUR

Maximum input values

Endress+Hauser

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

183

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Voltage drop

For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V

Pulse output
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current

22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Pulse width

Configurable: 0.05 to 2 000 ms

Maximum pulse rate

10 000 Impulse/s

Pulse value

Configurable

Assignable measured
variables• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• FAD volume flow
• Energy flow
• Heat flow
For SIL (application package), only mass flow

Frequency output
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current

22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Output frequency

Configurable: end value frequency 2 to 10 000 Hz(f max = 12 500 Hz)

Damping

Configurable: 0 to 999.9 s

Pulse/pause ratio

1:1

Assignable measured
variables• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• FAD volume flow
• Flow velocity• Temperature• Energy flow
• Pressure• Density• Heat flow
• Electronic temperature• 2nd temperature heat difference
For SIL (application package), only mass flow

Switch output

184

Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Switching behavior

Binary, conductive or non-conductive

Switching delay

Configurable: 0 to 100 s

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

Number of switchingcyclesUnlimited

Assignable functions

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic behavior• Limit value• Off• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• FAD volume flow
• Heat flow
• Energy flow
• Flow velocity• Density• Calorific value• Temperature• 2nd temperature heat difference• Totalizer 1-3• Electronic temperature• Flow direction monitoring• Status
Low flow cut off

Relay output
Function

Switch output

Version

Relay output, galvanically isolated

Switching behavior

Can be set to:• NO (normally open), factory setting• NC (normally closed)

Maximum switchingcapacity (passive)• DC 30 V, 0.1 A• AC 30 V, 0.5 A

Assignable functions

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic behavior• Limit value• Off• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• FAD volume flow
• Heat flow
• Energy flow
• Flow velocity• Density• Temperature• 2nd temperature heat difference• Totalizer 1-3• Electronics temperature• Flow direction monitoring• Status
Low flow cut off

User-configurable input/output
One specific input or output is assigned to a user-configurable input/output (configurableI/O) during device commissioning.
The following inputs and outputs are available for assignment:• Choice of current output: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)• Pulse/frequency/switch output• Choice of current input: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)• Status input
Endress+Hauser

185

Technical data

Signal on alarm

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Depending on the interface, failure information is displayed as follows:
Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Failure mode

Choose from:• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with NAMUR recommendation NE 43• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with US• Min. value: 3.59 mA• Max. value: 22.5 mA• Definable value between: 3.59 to 22.5 mA• Actual value• Last valid value

0 to 20 mA
Failure mode

Choose from:• Maximum alarm: 22 mA• Definable value between: 0 to 20.5 mA

Pulse/frequency/switch output
Pulse output
Fault mode

Choose from:• Actual value• No pulses

Frequency output
Fault mode

Choose from:• Actual value• 0 Hz• Definable value between: 2 to 12 500 Hz

Switch output
Fault mode

Choose from:• Current status• Open• Closed

Relay output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Current status• Open• Closed

Local display
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Backlight

Red lighting indicates a device error.

Status signal as per NAMUR recommendation NE 107

186

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

Interface/protocol• Via digital communication:
HART protocol• Via service interface• CDI-RJ45 service interface• WLAN interface
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Web browser
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Light emitting diodes (LED)
Status information

Status indicated by various light emitting diodes
The following information is displayed depending on the device version:• Supply voltage active• Data transmission active• Device alarm/error has occurred Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes →  143
Low flow cut off

The switch points for low flow cut off are user-selectable.

Galvanic isolation

The outputs are galvanically isolated:• from the power supply• from one another• from the potential equalization (PE) terminal

Protocol-specific data

Manufacturer ID

0x11

Device type ID

0x1160

HART protocol revision7

Device description files(DTM, DD)

Information and files under:
www.endress.com

HART load

Min. 250 Ω

System integration

Information on system integration →  75.
• Measured variables via HART protocol• Burst Mode functionality

15.5

Power supply

Terminal assignment→  36

Supply voltage

Order code
"Power supply"

Terminal voltage

Option D

DC 24 V

Option E

AC 100 to 240 V –15…+10%

Endress+Hauser

Frequency range±20%–
50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz

187

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Order code
"Power supply"

Terminal voltage
DC 24 V

Option I

Power consumption

Frequency range±20%

AC 100 to 240 V –15…+10%–
50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz

TransmitterMax. 10 W (active power)switch-on current

Current consumption

Max. 36 A (<5 ms) as per NAMUR Recommendation NE 21

Transmitter• Max. 400 mA (24 V)• Max. 200 mA (110 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V, 50/60 Hz)

Power supply failure• Totalizers stop at the last value measured.
• Depending on the device version, the configuration is retained in the device memory orin the pluggable data memory (HistoROM DAT).
• Error messages (incl. total operated hours) are stored.

Overcurrent protection
element

The device must be operated with a dedicated circuit breaker, as it does not have an
ON/OFF switch of its own.
• The circuit breaker must be easy to reach and labeled accordingly.
• Permitted nominal current of the circuit breaker: 2 A up to maximum 10 A.

Electrical connection→  38Potential equalization→  42

Terminals

Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).

Cable entries• Cable gland: M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)• Thread for cable entry:• NPT ½"
• G ½"• M20

Cable specification→  33

Overvoltage protection

Mains voltage fluctuations→  187

Overvoltage category

Overvoltage category II

Short-term, temporary overvoltage

Up to 1200 V between cable and ground, for max. 5 s

Long-term, temporary overvoltage

Up to 500 V between cable and ground

188

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

15.6
Reference operating
conditions

Performance characteristics• Error limits based on ISO 11631• Dry air with +20 to +30 °C (+68 to +86 °F) at 0.8 to 1.5 bar (12 to 22 psi)
• Specifications as per calibration protocol• Accuracy based on accredited calibration rigs that are traced to ISO 17025.
To obtain measured errors, use the Applicator sizing tool →  174

Maximum measured error

[%]
±10
±5
0
0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

[% kg/h][% lb/h]
A0042739

Calibrated measuring range
The measuring accuracy is specified in relation to the mass flow and divided into two
ranges:• ±1.0 % of the current measured value for 100% to 10% of the calibrated measuring
range (under reference operating conditions)• ±0.10 % of the calibrated full scale value for 10% to 1% of the calibrated measuring
range (under reference operating conditions)
The measuring device is calibrated and adjusted on an accredited and traceable calibration
rig and its accuracy is certified in a calibration report 1) (5 control points).
Order code for "Calibration flow":• Option G "Factory calibration": calibration report (5 control points)• Option K "Traceable ISO/IEC17025": Swiss Calibration Services (SCS) calibration report (5control points) which confirms traceability to the national calibration standard
For information on calibrated measuring ranges and maximum full scale values→  177
Extended measuring range
The device has an extended measuring range that goes beyond the maximum calibrated
value (100%). Here, the last measured values in the calibrated range are taken and thenextrapolated. The end of the extrapolated range is only reached once the productiveenergy of the sensor is exceeded and/or the Mach number is greater than listed below.
Machnumber1)

Order code

0.2

• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option SB "Bidirectional; stainless steel;stainless steel"• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option SC "Reverse flow detection;
stainless steel; stainless steel"

0.4• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option SA "Unidirectional; stainlesssteel; stainless steel"• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option HA "Unidirectional; Alloy;
stainless steel"Two calibration reports for the order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option SB "Bidirectional; stainless steel; stainless steel"Endress+Hauser

189

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

The accuracy is specified in relation to the mass flow.
±1.0% ±(current measured value in % -100%) × 0.07 for 100% to 200% of the calibrated
measuring range (under reference operating conditions)
Accuracy of outputs
The outputs have the following base accuracy specifications.
Current output
Accuracy±5 µA

Pulse/frequency output
o.r. = of reading
AccuracyMax. ±50 ppm o.r. (over the entire ambient temperature range)

Repeatability±0.25 % of the display value for velocities above 1.0 m/s (3.3 ft/s)

Response time

Typically < 3 s for 63 % of a step change (in both directions)Influence of ambient
temperature

Current output
Temperature coefficientMax. 1 μA/°C

Pulse/frequency output
Temperature coefficient

No additional effect. Included in accuracy.

Influence of medium
temperature

Air: 0.02 % per °C (0.036 % per °F) of the process temperature change in relation to thereference temperature

Influence of medium
pressure

Air: 0.3 % per bar (0.02 % per psi) of the process pressure change (from the set processpressure)

15.7
Mounting requirements→  19

15.8
Ambient temperature
range

190

Mounting

Environment

Measuring device• –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)• Order code for "Test, certificate", option JP:–50 to +60 °C (–58 to +140 °F)

Readability of the local
display–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside thetemperature range.

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

NOTICE
Danger of overheating‣ Ensure that the temperature at the lower end of the transmitter housing does notexceed 80 °C (176 °F).
‣ Ensure that sufficient convection takes place at the transmitter neck.
‣ When using in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in thedevice-specific Ex documentation. For detailed information on the temperature tables,
see the separate document entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device.
‣ Ensure that a sufficiently large area of the transmitter neck remains exposed. The
uncovered part serves as a radiator and protects the electronics from overheating andexcessive cooling.

‣ If operating outdoors:
Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
You can order a weather protection cover from Endress+Hauser→  171.

Storage temperature–50 to +80 °C (–58 to +176 °F), preferably at +20 °C (+68 °F)

Atmosphere

If a plastic transmitter housing is permanently exposed to certain steam and air mixtures,
this can damage the housing.
In cases of doubt, please contact the Sales Center.

Degree of protection

Transmitter• IP66/67, Type 4X enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 4• When the housing is open: IP20, Type 1 enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 2• Display module: IP20, Type 1 enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 2
Sensor• IP66/67, Type 4X enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 4• When the housing is open: IP20, Type 1 enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 2
Optional
Order code for "Sensor options", option CC "IP68, Type 6P, Cust-potted"
External WLAN antenna
IP67

Vibration- and shockresistanceVibration sinusoidal, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6
Sensor• 2 to 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm peak
• 8.4 to 2 000 Hz, 1 g peakTransmitter• 2 to 8.4 Hz, 7.5 mm peak
• 8.4 to 2 000 Hz, 2 g peak
Vibration broad-band random, according to IEC 60068-2-64
Sensor• 10 to 200 Hz, 0.003 g2/Hz• 200 to 2 000 Hz, 0.001 g2/Hz• Total: 1.54 g rms

Endress+Hauser

191

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Transmitter• 10 to 200 Hz, 0.01 g2/Hz• 200 to 2 000 Hz, 0.003 g2/Hz• Total: 2.70 g rms
Shock half-sine, according to IEC 60068-2-27• Sensor
6 ms 30 g• Transmitter
6 ms 50 g
Rough handling shocks according to IEC 60068-2-31
Interior cleaning

Suitable for cleaning-in-place (CIP) and sterilization-in-place (SIP).
Manufacturer options for delivery of parts• Oil- and grease-free wetted parts, no declaration. Order code for "Service", option HA.
• Oil- and grease-free wetted parts as per IEC/TR 60877-2.0 and BOC 50000810-4, withdeclaration. Order code for "Service", option HB. The plant operator must ensure that themeasuring device meets the requirements of the operator's oxygen application.

Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)

As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation 21 (NE 21)
Details are provided in the Declaration of Conformity.
This unit is not intended for use in residential environments and cannot guarantee
adequate protection of the radio reception in such environments.

192

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

15.9
Medium temperature range

Process

Sensor
–40 to +180 °C (–40 to +356 °F)
Seals• Sealing rings:• EPDM –40 to +140 °C (–40 to +284 °F)• FKM –40 to +180 °C (–40 to +356 °F)• Ferrule:• PEEK –40 to +140 °C (–40 to +284 °F)• PVDF –20 to +110 °C (–4 to +230 °F)• 1.4404 –40 to +180 °C (–40 to +356 °F)
Ferrule in 1.4404: ferrule has a fixed position on the shaft. Restriction for repeat
calibrations (observe minimum insertion depth →  20)

Medium pressure range

Minimum 0.5 bar absolute. Maximum permitted medium pressure →  193

Pressure/temperature
ratings

The following pressure/temperature diagrams apply to all pressure-bearing parts of thedevice and not just the process connection. The diagrams show the maximum permissible
medium pressure depending on the specific medium temperature.
Ferrule[psi] [bar]
50
600
40
400

1.4404

30
20

200
0

PEEK

10
0

-50
-80

50

0
0

80

100
160

240

150
320

200 [°C]
400[°F]
A0041035-EN

 44

With compression fitting material 1.4404/F316L/F316[psi] [bar]
400

30
20

200
0

10

PVDF

0
-50
-80

50

0
0

80

100
160

240

150
320

200 [°C]
400[°F]
A0041590-EN

 45

Flow limit

Endress+HauserWith compression fitting material 1.4404/F316L/F316

Measuring range →  177

193

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

The maximum flow depends on the gas type and the pipe nominal diameter used. The endof the measuring range is reached when the Mach number listed below is reached.
MachnumberOrder code

0.2

• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option SB "Bidirectional; stainless steel;stainless steel"• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option SC "Reverse flow detection;
stainless steel; stainless steel"

0.4• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option SA "Unidirectional; stainlesssteel; stainless steel"• Order code for "Sensor version; sensor; insertion tube:", option HA "Unidirectional; Alloy;
stainless steel"Use the Applicator to size the device.

Pressure loss

Use the Applicator for precise calculations.

System pressure→  26

Hot tap, process pressure

Only use the hot tap for mounting and removal at process pressure for non-toxic,
innocuous gases.
Medium pressure version• Max. process pressure: 20 bar (290 psi)
• Max. extraction pressure: 16 bar (230 psi)
• Max. extraction temperature: +50 °C (+122 °F)• Min. insertion sensor length: 435mm (17")
Low pressure version• Max. process pressure: 20 bar (290 psi)
• Max. extraction pressure: 4.5 bar (65 psi)
• Max. extraction temperature: +50 °C (+122 °F)• Min. insertion sensor length: 335mm (13")

Cold tap, ambient pressure

Cold tap for mounting and removal at ambient pressure.
• Max. process pressure: 20 bar (290 psi)
• Max. extraction pressure: 1 bar (14.5 psi)
• Max. extraction temperature: +50 °C (+122 °F)• Min. insertion sensor length: 335mm (13")

Mounting boss

To mount the device directly on the process pipe.
Max. process pressure: 40 bar (580 psi)

15.10 Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions

For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section .

Weight194

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

Transmitter• Proline 500 – digital polycarbonate: 1.4 kg (3.1 lbs)
• Proline 500 – digital aluminum: 2.4 kg (5.3 lbs)
Sensor• Sensor with cast connection housing version, stainless: +3.7 kg (+8.2 lbs)
• Sensor with aluminum connection housing version:
Weight in SI units
Installed length [mm]Weight [kg]

235

2.2

335

2.3

435

2.4

608

2.5

Installed length [in]Weight [lbs]

9

4.9

13

5.1

17

5.3

24

5.5

Weight in US units

Materials

Transmitter housing
Housing of Proline 500 – digital transmitter
Order code for "Transmitter housing":• Option A "Aluminum coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated• Option D "Polycarbonate": polycarbonate
Window material
Order code for "Transmitter housing":• Option A "Aluminum, coated": glass• Option D "Polycarbonate": plastic
Sensor connection housing
Order code for "Sensor connection housing":• Option A "Aluminum coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated• Option L "Cast, stainless": 1.4409 (CF3M) similar to 316L

Endress+Hauser

195

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Cable entries/cable glands

1

2
3
A0020640

 46
1
2
3

Possible cable entries/cable glands

Female thread M20 × 1.5
Cable gland M20 × 1.5
Adapter for cable entry with female thread G ½" or NPT ½"

Cable entries and adapters

Material

Cable gland M20 × 1.5

Plastic• Adapter for cable entry with female thread G ½"
• Adapter for cable entry with female thread NPT ½"

Nickel-plated brassavailable for certain device versions: •OnlyOrdercode for "Transmitter housing":• Option A "Aluminum, coated"• Option D "Polycarbonate"• Order code for "Sensor connection housing":
Proline 500 – digital:
Option A "Aluminum coated"
Option B "Stainless"Materials for insertion tube
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L)
Process connections, process coupling
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L)
Sensing element
Unidirectional• Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L)• Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022);
Bidirectional
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L)
Reverse flow detection
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L)
Ferrules• PEEK• PVDF• 1.4404 (316/316L)

196

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

Flat ring seal
• EPDM• FKM
For aggressive media (e.g. chlorine or ozone), we recommend special materials (Alloyfor sensing element, PVDF or 1.4404 for ferrules and FKM for flat seal). For any
requests, please contact the Endress+Hauser sales organization responsible for yourarea.
Sensor guard
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L)
Accessories
Protective cover
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)
External WLAN antenna• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylonitrile styrene acrylate) and nickel-plated brass• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass• Cable: Polyethylene• Plug: Nickel-plated brass• Angle bracket: Stainless steel
Mounting boss (DK6MB)
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L)
Cold/hot tap, low pressure and medium pressure
Welding socket
Stainless steel 1.4404 (316L)
Ball valve• Stainless cast steel CF3M or CF8M
• Seal: PTFE
Sensor connection
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L)
Cold tap, atmospheric pressure• Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L)• Stainless cast steel CF3M or CF8M
• Seal: PTFE
Process connections• G¾", ISO 228/1 compression fitting• G1", ISO 228/1, compression fitting• ¾" NPT, compression fitting• 1" NPT, compression fitting
For information on the different materials used in the process connections →  196

Endress+Hauser

197

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

15.11 Display and user interface
Languages

Can be operated in the following languages:• Via local operation
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish• Via Web browser
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish• Via "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian,
Chinese, Japanese

Local operation

Via display module
Equipment:• Order code for "Display; operation", option F "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control""• Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control + WLAN"
Information about WLAN interface →  71
Display elements• 4-line, illuminated, graphic display• White background lighting; switches to red in event of device errors• Format for displaying measured variables and status variables can be individuallyconfigured
Operating elements• External operation via touch control (3 optical keys) without opening the housing: ,, • Operating elements also accessible in the various zones of the hazardous area

Remote operation→  69Service interface→  70Supported operating tools

Different operating tools can be used for local or remote access to the measuring device.
Depending on the operating tool used, access is possible with different operating units andvia a variety of interfaces.

198

Supported operating
tools

Operating unit

Interface

Additional information

Web browser

Notebook, PC or tablet
with web browser• CDI-RJ45 service
interface• WLAN interface

Special Documentation fordeviceDeviceCare SFE100

Notebook, PC or tablet• CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windowsinterfacesystem• WLAN interface• Fieldbus protocol→  174

FieldCare SFE500

Notebook, PC or tablet• CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windowsinterfacesystem• WLAN interface• Fieldbus protocol→  174

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

Supported operating
tools

Operating unit

Interface

Additional information

Field Xpert

SMT70/77/50• All Fieldbus protocols• WLAN interface• Bluetooth• CDI-RJ45 service
interface

Operating Instructions
BA01202S

WLAN→  174

SmartBlue app

Smart phone or tablet
with iOs or Android

Device description files:
Use update function ofhandheld terminal

Other operating tools based on FDT technology with a device driver such as DTM/
iDTM or DD/EDD can be used for device operation. These operating tools are available
from the individual manufacturers. Integration into the following operating tools,
among others, is supported:• FactoryTalk AssetCentre (FTAC) from Rockwell Automation →www.rockwellautomation.com• Process Device Manager (PDM) from Siemens → www.siemens.com• Asset Management Solutions (AMS) from Emerson → www.emersonprocess.com• FieldCommunicator 375/475 from Emerson → www.emersonprocess.com• Field Device Manager (FDM) from Honeywell → www.process.honeywell.com• FieldMate from Yokogawa → www.yokogawa.com• PACTWare → www.pactware.com
The related device description files are available: www.endress.com → Download Area
Web serverWith the integrated web server, the device can be operated and configured via a web
browser service interface (CDI-RJ45) or WLAN interface. The structure of the operating
menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values, status
information on the device is displayed and can be used to monitor device health.
Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters can be
configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication bycomputer or a mobile handheld terminal.
Supported functions
Data exchange between the operating unit (such as a notebook, for example,) andmeasuring device:• Upload the configuration from the measuring device (XML format, configuration
backup)• Save the configuration to the measuring device (XML format, restore configuration)• Export event list (.csv file)• Export parameter settings (.csv file or PDF file, document the measuring point
configuration)• Export the Heartbeat verification log (PDF file, only available with the Heartbeat
Verification →  205 application package)• Flash firmware version for device firmware upgrade, for example• Download driver for system integration• Visualize up to 1000 saved measured values (only available with the Extended
HistoROM application package→  205)
Special Documentation for web serverEndress+Hauser

199

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

HistoROM
data management

The measuring device features HistoROM data management. HistoROM data management
comprises both the storage and import/export of key device and process data, making
operation and servicing far more reliable, secure and efficient.
When the device is delivered, the factory settings of the configuration data are stored
as a backup in the device memory. This memory can be overwritten with an updated
data record, for example after commissioning.
Additional information on the data storage concept

There are different types of data storage units in which device data are stored and used by the device:
Available data

HistoROM backup

T-DAT

S-DAT

• Event logbook, e.g. diagnostic
events• Parameter data record backup• Device firmware package• Measured value logging ("Extended
HistoROM" order option)• Current parameter data record (used byfirmware at run time)• Indicator (minimum/maximum values)• Totalizer value• Sensor data: e.g. nominal diameter• Serial number• Calibration data
• Device configuration (e.g. SW options,
fixed I/O or multi I/O)

Can be plugged into the user interface PC
board in the connection compartment

In the sensor plug in the transmitter neckpart

Storage location Fixed on the user interface PC
board in the connection
compartment

Data backup
Automatic• The most important device data (sensor and transmitter) are automatically saved in the
DAT modules• If the transmitter or measuring device is replaced: once the T-DAT containing theprevious device data has been exchanged, the new measuring device is ready for
operation again immediately without any errors• If the sensor is replaced: once the sensor has been replaced, new sensor data aretransferred from the S-DAT in the measuring device and the measuring device is readyfor operation again immediately without any errors• If exchanging the electronics module (e.g. I/O electronics module): Once the electronics
module has been replaced, the software of the module is compared against the current
device firmware. The module software is upgraded or downgraded where necessary. The
electronics module is available for use immediately afterwards and no compatibility
problems occur.
ManualAdditional parameter data record (complete parameter settings) in the integrated device
memory HistoROM backup for:• Data backup function
Backup and subsequent restoration of a device configuration in the device memory
HistoROM backup• Data comparison function
Comparison of the current device configuration with the device configuration saved in
the device memory HistoROM backup
Data transmission
ManualTransfer of a device configuration to another device using the export function of thespecific operating tool, e.g. with FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server: to duplicate theconfiguration or to store in an archive (e.g. for backup purposes)

200

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

Event list
Automatic• Chronological display of up to 20 event messages in the events list
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: up to 100
event messages are displayed in the events list along with a time stamp, plain text
description and remedial measures• The events list can be exported and displayed via a variety of interfaces and operating
tools e.g. DeviceCare, FieldCare or Web server
Data logging
ManualIf the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled:• Recording of 1 to 4 channels of up to 1 000 measured values (up to 250 measured values
per channel)• User configurable recording interval• Export the measured value log via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or web serverEndress+Hauser

201

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

15.12 Certificates and approvals
Current certificates and approvals for the product are available at www.endress.com on therelevant product page:CE mark

1.

Select the product using the filters and search field.

2.

Open the product page.

3.

Select Downloads.

The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable EU Directives. These are listed in
the corresponding EU Declaration of Conformity along with the standards applied.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.

UKCA marking

The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable UK regulations (Statutory
Instruments). These are listed in the UKCA Declaration of Conformity along with thedesignated standards. By selecting the order option for UKCA marking, Endress+Hauser
confirms a successful evaluation and testing of the device by affixing the UKCA mark.
Contact address Endress+Hauser UK:
Endress+Hauser Ltd.
Floats Road
Manchester M23 9NF
United Kingdom
www.uk.endress.com

RCM marking

The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the "Australian Communications
and Media Authority (ACMA)".

Ex approval

The measuring device is certified for use in hazardous areas and the relevant safety
instructions are provided in the separate "Safety Instructions" (XA) document. Reference ismade to this document on the nameplate.
The separate Ex documentation (XA) containing all the relevant explosion protection
data is available from your Endress+Hauser sales center.
Proline 500 – digital
ATEX/IECEx
Currently, the following versions for use in hazardous areas are available:
Ex db
Transmitter

SensorCategory

Type of protection

Category

Type of protection

II(1)G[Ex ia] IIC

II1/2G

Ex db ia IIC T4…T1 Ga/Gb

II(1)G[Ex ia] IIC

II2G

Ex db ia IIC T4…T1 Gb

II3G

Ex ec nC [ia Ga] IIC T5…T1 Gc

II1/2G

Ex db ia IIC T4…T1 Ga/Gb

II3G

Ex ec nC [ia Ga] IIC T5…T1 Gc

II2G

Ex db ia IIC T4…T1 Gb

Ex tb
Transmitter202

SensorCategory

Type of protection

Category

Type of protection

II(1)D[Ex ia] IIIC

II2D

Ex tb IIIC T** °C Db

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

Non-Ex / Ex ec
Transmitter

SensorCategory

Type of protection

Category

Type of protection

Non - Ex

Non-Ex

II3G

Ex ec IIC T4…T1 Gc

II3G

Ex ec nC IIC T5…T1 Gc

II3G

Ex ec IIC T4…T1 Gc

CCSAUS

Currently, the following versions for use in hazardous areas are available:
IS (Ex nA, Ex i)
Transmitter

SensorClass I Division 2 Groups A - D

Class I, II, III Division 1 Groups A-G

Transmitter

SensorClass I Division 2 Groups A - D

Class I Division 2 Groups A - D

Transmitter

Sensor

Ex ec nC [ia Ga] IIC T5…T1 Gc

Ex db ia IIC T4…T1 Gb

Ex ec nC [ia Ga] IIC T5…T1 Gc

Ex db ia IIC T4…T1 Ga/Gb

Transmitter

SensorClass I, Zone 2 AEx/ Ex nA IIC T5...T4 Gc

Class I, Zone 2 AEx/ Ex nA IIC T5...T1 Gc

Transmitter

SensorNon - Ex

Zone 21, AEx/Ex ia tb IIIC T** °C Db

NI (Ex nA)

Ex db

Ex nA

Ex tb

Functional safety

The measuring device can be used for flow monitoring systems (min., max., range) up to
SIL 2 (single-channel architecture; order code for "Additional approval", option LA) and SIL
3 (multi-channel architecture with homogeneous redundancy) and is independently
evaluated and certified in accordance with IEC 61508.
The following types of monitoring in safety equipment are possible:
Mass flow
Functional safety manual with information and restrictions for the SIL device→  206

HART certification

HART interface
The measuring device is certified and registered by the FieldComm Group. The measuringsystem meets all the requirements of the following specifications:• Certified according to HART 7• The device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers(interoperability)

Endress+Hauser

203

Technical data

Radio approval

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

The measuring device has radio approval.
For detailed information on the radio approval, see the Special Documentation→  206

Additional certification

CRN approval
Some device versions have CRN approval. A CRN-approved process connection with a CSA
approval must be ordered for a CRN-approved device.

External standards andguidelines• EN 60529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosure (IP code)• EN 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratoryuse - general requirements• IEC/EN 61326-2-3
Emission in accordance with Class A requirements. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
requirements).
• NAMUR NE 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control
equipment• NAMUR NE 32
Data retention in the event of a power failure in field and control instruments withmicroprocessors• NAMUR NE 43
Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitterswith analog output signal.
• NAMUR NE 53
Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics• NAMUR NE 105
Specifications for integrating fieldbus devices in engineering tools for field devices• NAMUR NE 107
Self-monitoring and diagnosis of field devices• NAMUR NE 131
Requirements for field devices for standard applications• ETSI EN 300 328
Guidelines for 2.4 GHz radio components.
• EN 301489
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM).

Classification of process
sealing between electricalsystems and (flammable or
combustible) process fluids
in accordance with
ANSI/ISA 12.27.01

Endress+Hauser devices are designed in accordance with ANSI/ISA 12.27.01. allowing theuser to waive the use and save the cost of installing external secondary process seals in the
conduit as required by the process sealing sections of ANSI/NFPA 70 (NEC) and CSA 22.1
(CEC). These devices comply with the North American installation practice and provide avery safe and cost-saving installation for pressurized applications with hazardous fluids.
Further information can be found in the control drawings of the relevant devices.

204

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

15.13 Application packages
Many different application packages are available to enhance the functionality of thedevice. Such packages might be needed to address safety aspects or specific application
requirements.
The application packages can be ordered with the device or subsequently fromEndress+Hauser. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from yourlocal Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website:www.endress.com.
Detailed information on the application packages:
Special Documentation →  206
Diagnostic functionality

Order code for "Application package", option EA "Extended HistoROM"
Comprises extended functions concerning the event log and the activation of the measured
value memory.
Event log:
Memory volume is extended from 20 message entries (standard version) to up to 100
entries.
Data logging (line recorder):• Memory capacity for up to 1000 measured values is activated.
• 250 measured values can be output via each of the 4 memory channels. The recording
interval can be defined and configured by the user.
• Measured value logs can be accessed via the local display or operating tool e.g. FieldCare,
DeviceCare or Web server.
For detailed information, see the Operating Instructions for the device.

Heartbeat Technology

Order code for "Application package", option EB "Heartbeat Verification + Monitoring"
Heartbeat Verification
Meets the requirement for traceable verification to DIN ISO 9001:2008 Chapter 7.6 a)"Control of monitoring and measuring equipment".
• Functional testing in the installed state without interrupting the process.
• Traceable verification results on request, including a report.
• Simple testing process via local operation or other operating interfaces.
• Clear measuring point assessment (pass/fail) with high test coverage within theframework of manufacturer specifications.
• Extension of calibration intervals according to operator's risk assessment.
Heartbeat Monitoring
Continuously supplies data, which are characteristic of the measuring principle, to an
external condition monitoring system for the purpose of preventive maintenance orprocess analysis. These data enable the operator to:• Draw conclusions - using these data and other information - about the impact on themeasuring performance over time.
• Schedule servicing in time.
• Monitor the process or product quality , e.g. process stability.
Special Documentation SD02712D

Second gas group

Endress+Hauser

Package

Description

Second gas group

This application package enables the configuration of two different standard
gases/gas mixtures in the device and allows the user to switch from one gas group
to another using the status input or (if available) via bus communication.

205

Technical data

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

15.14 Accessories
Overview of accessories available for order →  171

15.15 Documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number from thenameplate• Endress+Hauser Operations app: Enter serial number from nameplate or scanmatrix code on nameplate.
Standard documentation

Brief Operating Instructions

Brief Operating Instructions for the sensor
Measuring device

Documentation code

Proline t-mass I

KA01443D

Brief Operating Instructions for the transmitter
Measuring device

Documentation code

Proline 500 – digital

KA01446D

Technical Information
Measuring device

Documentation codet-mass I 500

TI01503D

Description of Device Parameters
Measuring device

Documentation codet-mass 500

GP01145D

Supplementary devicedependent documentation

Safety instructions
Safety instructions for electrical equipment for hazardous areas.

Contents

Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex d/Ex de

XA01970D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec

XA01971D

cCSAus XP

XA01974D

cCSAus Ex d/ Ex de

XA01972D

cCSAus Ex nA

XA01973D

206

Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Technical data

Remote display and operating module DKX001
Contents

Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex i

XA01494D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec

XA01498D

cCSAus IS

XA01499D

cCSAus Ex nA

XA01513D

INMETRO Ex i

XA01500D

INMETRO Ex ec

XA01501D

NEPSI Ex i

XA01502D

NEPSI Ex nA

XA01503D

Functional safety manualContents

Documentation code

Proline t-mass 500

SD02484D

Special documentation
Contents

Documentation code

Information on the Pressure Equipment Directive

SD01614D

Remote display and operating module DKX001

SD01763D

Radio approvals for WLAN interface for A309/A310 display module

SD01793D

Web server

SD02487D

Heartbeat Technology

SD02479D

Installation Instructions
Contents

Comment

Installation instructions for spare part sets andaccessories• Access the overview of all the available spare part sets via Device Viewer →  169• Accessories available for order with Installation Instructions

Endress+Hauser

207

Index

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Index
A

Access authorization to parameters
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Incorrect input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Adapting the status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Additional certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Ambient temperature
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

B

Burst mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

C

Cable entries
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Cable entry
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 202
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Check
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Checklist
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Cleaning
Cleaning the sensing element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Sensing element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Cold tap, ambient pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Communication-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Connecting the connecting cable
Proline 500 – digital transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Sensor connection housing, Proline 500 - digital . . 38
Terminal assignment of Proline 500 - digital . . . . . 38
Connecting the measuring device
Proline 500 – digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connecting the signal cable/supply voltage cable
Proline 500 – digital transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connection
see Electrical connection
Connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connection preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connection tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Context menu
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
208

Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

D

Date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Defining the access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 127
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 191
DesignMeasuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Device locking, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Device nameSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Device repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Device revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Device type ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Diagnosis
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Diagnostic behavior
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Diagnostic information
Design, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 150
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Light emitting diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Remedial measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
DIP switch
see Write protection switch
Direct access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Direct access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Disabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Displaysee Local display
Display area
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Display values
For locking status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Displaying data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Document
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

E

Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 56
Electrical connection
Commubox FXA195 (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Computer with web browser (e.g. Microsoft Edge) 69
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Field Xpert SFX350/SFX370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Field Xpert SMT70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, AMS Device
Manager, SIMATIC PDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Operating tools
Via HART protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Via WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
VIATOR Bluetooth modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Enabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Enabling/disabling the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Endress+Hauser services
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Environment
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Error messages
see Diagnostic messages
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Extended order code
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

F

Field Communicator
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Field of application
Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Field Xpert
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Field Xpert SFX350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
FirmwareRelease date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Endress+Hauser

Index

Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Flow conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Function range
AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Function scope
Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Field Xpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Functional Safety (SIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Functionssee Parameters

G

Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

H

Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
HART certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
HART protocol
Device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Measured variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Help text
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
HistoROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 123
Hot tap, process pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

I

Identifying the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Influence
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Medium pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Information about this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Inspection
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Received goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installation conditions
Sensor heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

LLanguages, operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Line recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
see Diagnostic message
see In alarm condition
see Operational display
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

M

Main electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
209

Index

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . 113, 123
Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Measured variables
see Process variables
Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Measuring device
Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Integrating via HART protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Preparing for electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Medium pressure
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Menu
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Menus
For measuring device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
For specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Mounting preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Mounting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

N

NameplateSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Navigation path (navigation view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Navigation view
In the submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
In the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

O

Onsite display
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 146
Operating keys
see Operating elements
Operating menu
Menus, submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Submenus and user roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
210

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Order code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Output variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

P

Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Parameter
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Entering values or text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Parameter settings
Adjustment values in use (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . 121
Administration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Advanced setup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Burst configuration 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . 77
Configuration backup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . 113, 123
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Current input (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Current input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Current output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Data logging (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Define access code (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Device information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Diagnostics (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Display (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Display (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
I/O configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
In-situ adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Low flow cut off (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Measurement mode (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Process variables (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Pulse/frequency/switch output (Wizard) 96, 97, 100
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n (Submenu) 135
Reference conditions (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Relay output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Relay output 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Reset access code (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Setup (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Simulation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Status input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 133
System units (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
System values (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Totalizer (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Totalizer 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Totalizer handling (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Value current output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . 134
Web server (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
WLAN settings (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Post-connection check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Post-installation check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Post-mounting check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Endress+Hauser

Proline t-mass I 500 HART

Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Process
Cold tap, ambient pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Hot tap, process pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Proline 500 – digital transmitter
Connecting the signal cable/supply voltage cable . . 41
Protecting parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

RRadio approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
RCM marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Reading off measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Remedial measures
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Repair of a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Replacement
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Requirements for personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

S

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Sensor heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Settings
Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Advanced display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
In-situ adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . 113, 123
Measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 97
Reference conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Resetting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Resetting the totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Endress+Hauser

Index

System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
SIL (functional safety) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Spare part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
SpecialInstallation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Status area
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Status signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 148
Storage concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Structure
Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Submenu
Adjustment values in use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 116
Advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Burst configuration 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Configuration backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 123
Current input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
In-situ adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . 135
Reference conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Reset access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 133
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
System values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Totalizer 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Totalizer handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Value current output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
211

IndexSymbols
Controlling data entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
For communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
For diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
For locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
For measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
For measurement channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
For menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
For parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
For status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
For submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
For wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
In the status area of the local display . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
System design
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
see Measuring device design
System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

T

Technical data, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Temperature range
Ambient temperature range for display . . . . . . . . 198
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Terminal assignment of connecting cable for Proline
500- digital
Sensor connection housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Tool
For mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tool tipsee Help textTools
For electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Totalizer
Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Transporting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Troubleshooting
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Proline t-mass I 500 HARTW

W@M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 169
W@M Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
WeightSI units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Transport (notes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
US units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
WizardCurrent input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . 96, 97, 100
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Write protection
Via access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

U

UKCA marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Use of measuring device
Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
see Intended use
User interface
Current diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Previous diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
User roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

V

Version data for the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
212

Endress+Hauser

*71620291*
71620291

www.addresses.endress.com